COULTER® LH 500 Series System

Instructions for Use

PN 624602A (January 2004)

Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Fullerton, CA 92835
 WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS

READ ALL PRODUCT MANUALS AND CONSULT WITH BECKMAN COULTER-TRAINED PERSONNEL BEFORE ATTEMPTING
TO OPERATE INSTRUMENT. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO PERFORM ANY PROCEDURE BEFORE CAREFULLY READING ALL
INSTRUCTIONS. ALWAYS FOLLOW PRODUCT LABELING AND MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDATIONS. IF IN DOUBT AS
TO HOW TO PROCEED IN ANY SITUATION, CONTACT YOUR BECKMAN COULTER REPRESENTATIVE.

HAZARDS AND OPERATIONAL PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and IMPORTANTS alert you as follows:
WARNING - Can cause injury.
CAUTION - Can cause damage to the instrument.
IMPORTANT - Can cause misleading results.

BECKMAN COULTER, INC. URGES ITS CUSTOMERS TO COMPLY WITH ALL NATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
STANDARDS SUCH AS THE USE OF BARRIER PROTECTION. THIS MAY INCLUDE, BUT IT IS NOT LIMITED TO,
PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR, GLOVES, AND SUITABLE LABORATORY ATTIRE WHEN OPERATING OR MAINTAINING THIS OR
ANY OTHER AUTOMATED LABORATORY ANALYZER.

WARNING Risk of operator injury if:

r All doors, covers and panels are not closed and secured in place prior to and during instrument operation.
r The integrity of safety interlocks and sensors is compromised.
r Instrument alarms and error messages are not acknowledged and acted upon.
r You contact moving parts.
r You mishandle broken parts.
r Doors, covers and panels are not opened, closed, removed and/or replaced with care.
r Improper tools are used for troubleshooting.
To avoid injury:
r Keep doors, covers and panels closed and secured in place while the instrument is in use.
r Take full advantage of the safety features of the instrument. Do not defeat safety interlocks and sensors.
r Acknowledge and act upon instrument alarms and error messages.
r Keep away from moving parts.
r Report any broken parts to your Beckman Coulter Representative.
r Open/remove and close/replace doors, covers and panels with care.
r Use the proper tools when troubleshooting.

CAUTION System integrity might be compromised and operational failures might occur if:
r This equipment is used in a manner other than specified. Operate the instrument as instructed in the Product Manuals.
r You introduce software that is not authorized by Beckman Coulter into your computer. Only operate your system’s
computer with software authorized by Beckman Coulter.
r You install software that is not an original copyrighted version. Only use software that is an original copyrighted
version to prevent virus contamination.

IMPORTANT If you purchased this product from anyone other than Beckman Coulter or an authorized Beckman Coulter
distributor, and, if it is not presently under a Beckman Coulter service maintenance agreement, Beckman Coulter cannot
guarantee that the product is fitted with the most current mandatory engineering revisions or that you will receive the most
current information bulletins concerning the product. If you purchased this product from a third party and would like
further information concerning this topic, call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
 REVISION STATUS

Issue A, 1/04
LH 500 Software Version 1A. Manual derived from Online Help Version 1A.033081.

This document applies to the latest software listed and higher versions. When a subsequent software version
changes the information in this document, a new issue will be released.

PN 624602A iii
REVISION STATUS

iv PN 624602A
 CONTENTS

REVISION STATUS, iii

INTRODUCTION, xvii

HOW TO USE YOUR COULTER® LH 500 SERIES SYSTEM HARD-COPY

MANUALS, xvii

ABOUT THIS MANUAL, xviii

ONLINE HELP SYSTEM, xix

CONVENTIONS, xix

1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW, 1-1

1.1 INTENDED USE, 1-1

Parameters, 1-1
CLIA Complexity Categories, 1-2

1.2 LH 500 SERIES SYSTEM, 1-3

LH 500 Front View, 1-3
LH 500 Left Side View, 1-5
LH 500 Rear View, 1-6
LH 500 Right Side View, 1-7
Workstation, 1-8
Workstation (Back View), 1-8
Workstation Keyboard, 1-9
CD ROM Drive, 1-9
3.5-inch Diskette Drive, 1-9
Power On/Off (Workstation), 1-10

1.3 USING COMMAND CENTER, 1-10

Application Buttons, 1-10
Process Type, 1-11
Bar-Code ID, 1-12
Status Area, 1-12
Predilute and Factor, 1-13
Rule Type, 1-13
User, 1-14
Aspiration Mode, 1-14
Enabling/Disabling Blood Detector, 1-14

1.4 CASSETTE HANDLING, 1-14

Cleaning the Cassette, 1-14

1.5 PRINTER, 1-15

1.6 STANDBY/RESET SWITCH, 1-15

1.7 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS, 1-15

Characteristics, 1-15
Sample Stability, 1-15

PN 624602A v
CONTENTS

WBC Differential Flagging Stability, 1-17

Reference Ranges, 1-18
Known Interfering Substances and Conditions, 1-18
ALL, 1-19
WBC, 1-19
RBC, 1-19
Hgb, 1-19
MCV, 1-19
RDW, 1-19
Plt, 1-19
MPV, 1-20
Hct, 1-20
MCH, 1-20
MCHC, 1-20
Diff Parameters, 1-20
Reticulocytes, 1-20

2 STARTUP, 2-1

2.1 LOGGING OFF/ON THE WORKSTATION, 2-1

Logging OFF, 2-1
Logging ON, 2-1

2.2 PERFORMING DAILY STARTUP, 2-1

2.3 PERFORMING THE DAILY CLEAN CYCLE, 2-1

2.4 CHECKING DAILY TEST RESULTS, 2-2

2.5 CHECKING BACKGROUND TEST RESULTS, 2-2

2.6 CHECKING HGB VOLTAGE TEST RESULTS, 2-2

3 QUALITY CONTROL, 3-1

3.1 QUALITY CONTROL OVERVIEW, 3-1

3.2 RUNNING LATEX CONTROL—DIFF AND RETIC, 3-1

3.3 CYCLING CONTROLS IN RETIC MODE, 3-2

Retic Control Preparation, 3-2
Retic Control Analysis, 3-4

3.5 CYCLING CBC/DIFF CONTROLS IN MANUAL ASPIRATION MODE, 3-6

3.7 CONTROL CODES AND FLAGS, 3-7

When a Control is Outside Its Expected Ranges, 3-9
Finding Control Results, 3-10
Transmit, Print and Archive, 3-10

3.9 DELETING CONTROL DATA, 3-10

3.10 ADJUSTING CONTROL LIMITS, 3-11

vi PN 624602A
 CONTENTS

3.11 PROVIDING COMMENTS FOR QUALITY ASSURANCE, 3-11

IQAP Setup, 3-12
IQAP Download Procedure, 3-12
Troubleshooting, 3-13

3.13 XB ANALYSIS, 3-13

Overview, 3-13
Using XB, 3-13
Setup Options, 3-13
Reviewing XB Analysis Information, 3-14
Reviewing XB Results, 3-14

4 SAMPLE ANALYSIS, 4-1

4.1 COLLECTING SPECIMENS, 4-1

4.2 STORING SPECIMENS, 4-1

Venipuncture Specimens, 4-1
Capillary Specimens, 4-1

4.3 IDENTIFYING SAMPLES OVERVIEW, 4-2

Automatic Aspiration Mode, 4-2
Manual Aspiration Mode, 4-2
Setting Up Identifiers, 4-2

4.4 UNIVERSAL TUBE PROCESSING, 4-2

Cleaning the Cassette, 4-5
Loading the Cassette, 4-5

4.8 CYCLING SAMPLES IN MANUAL ASPIRATION MODE, 4-7

4.9 CYCLING SAMPLES IN PRE-DILUTE MODE, 4-7

4.10 CHANGING RUN TYPE, 4-9

4.11 ENABLING/DISABLING BLOOD DETECTOR, 4-9

5 DATA REVIEW, 5-1

5.1 REVIEWING SAMPLE RESULTS, 5-1

5.2 REVIEWING RESEARCH DATA, 5-1

5.3 REVIEWING HISTOGRAMS, 5-1

What to Look For, 5-2

5.4 EDITING SAMPLE RESULTS, 5-2

5.5 REVIEWING PATIENT HISTORY, 5-3

5.6 PROCESSING RESULTS OVERVIEW, 5-3

Flagging, 5-3
Rules for Flagging Results (Decision Rules & Criteria), 5-4

PN 624602A vii
CONTENTS

5.7 FLAGS AND CODES, 5-5

Establishing Flagging Levels, 5-6
Flags, 5-6
Codes, 5-7

5.8 SUSPECT AND DEFINITIVE MESSAGES, 5-8

Establishing Flagging Levels, 5-8
Suspect Messages, 5-8
Definitive Messages, 5-10

5.9 AUTO VALIDATION OVERVIEW, 5-11

Auto Validation Example, 5-13
Auto Validation Setup, 5-13
Sample Setup:, 5-13
Sample Setup:, 5-14

6 SHUTDOWN, 6-1

6.1 POWER ON/OFF OVERVIEW, 6-1

Analyzer, 6-1
Instrument Computer, 6-1
Workstation Computer, 6-1
Monitor, 6-1

6.2 PERFORMING DAILY SHUTDOWN, 6-1

6.3 PERFORMING EXTENDED SHUTDOWN, 6-2

6.4 SHUTTING DOWN THE WORKSTATION, 6-2

6.5 RESETTING THE WORKSTATION, 6-3

Using the Command Center, 6-3
Using the Keyboard, 6-3

7 OPERATION PRINCIPLES, 7-1

7.1 GENERAL PRINCIPLES, 7-1

CBC Analysis, 7-1
Differential Analysis, 7-1
Effect of Reagents, 7-2
Retic Analysis, 7-2

7.2 SPECIMEN TRANSPORT, 7-3

7.3 SAMPLE FLOW, 7-4

Normal Sample Flow, 7-4
Retic Sample Flow, 7-8

7.4 COUNTING AND SIZING, 7-8

Red and White Blood Cell Counting, 7-8
Routine Counting, 7-8
Extended Counting, 7-9

viii PN 624602A
 CONTENTS

Coincidence Correction, 7-9

Triplicate Counting/Voting, 7-9
Sweep Flow, 7-9
Pulse Editing, 7-10
RBC Count and Size Distribution, 7-10
Plt Count and Size Distribution, 7-10
Plt Fitting Process, 7-10

7.5 SCATTERPLOT DEVELOPMENT, 7-11

Differential-Related, 7-11
Retic-Related, 7-12
Retic Parameters, 7-13
Derived and Computed Parameters, 7-13
Hgb CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT, 7-13
PARAMETERS AND THEIR DERIVATION, 7-13
White Blood Cell (WBC) Count, 7-13
Red Blood Cell (RBC), 7-13
Hemoglobin (Hgb) Concentration, 7-13
Mean Corpuscular Volume (MCV), 7-14
Hematocrit (Hct), 7-14
Mean Corpuscular Hemoglobin (MCH), 7-14
Mean Corpuscular Hemoglobin Concentration (MCHC), 7-14
Red Distribution Width (RDW), 7-14
Platelet (Plt) Count, 7-14
Mean Platelet Volume (MPV), 7-14
Differential Counts, 7-15
Percentages, 7-15
Absolute Numbers, 7-15
Reticulocyte (Retic) Parameters, 7-15
Reticulocyte Percent (RET%), 7-15
Reticulocyte Absolute Number (RET#), 7-16
Mean Reticulocyte Volume (MRV), 7-16
Immature reticulocyte fraction (IRF), 7-16

7.6 METHOD HISTORY, 7-17

Development, 7-17
W.H. Coulter (1956) describes the Coulter Principle:4, 7-17
Hemoglobinometry, 7-17
Differential Measurement, 7-18
Volume Analysis, 7-18
Conductivity Analysis, 7-18
Light Scatter Analysis, 7-18
Reticulocyte (Retic) Analysis, 7-18
XB Analysis, 7-18

8 SETUP, 8-1

8.1 SYSTEM SETUP OVERVIEW, 8-1

8.2 CHANGING REAGENT INFORMATION, 8-2

PN 624602A ix
CONTENTS

8.3 SETTING UP CONTROLS, 8-3

Specifying Latex Reference Values, 8-4
Deleting Control Setup Information, 8-4
Editing Control Setup Information, 8-5
Setting Up Lab Limits for Controls, 8-6
Deleting Lab Limits, 8-7

8.4 SETTING UP XB ANALYSIS, 8-7

8.5 SETTING UP SHIFTS FOR CONTROLS, 8-8

8.6 SETTING UP DISPLAY LABELS FOR REPORTING, 8-9

8.7 SETTING UP A POSITIVE IDENTIFIER, 8-9

8.8 SETTING UP AUTOSEQUENCING, 8-10

8.9 SPECIFYING THE PARAMETERS YOU WANT TO REPORT, 8-11

Certifying Research Parameters, 8-11

8.10 SETTING UP REPORTING UNITS, 8-12

8.11 SETTING UP FLAGGING LIMITS, 8-12

Defining Definitive Messages, 8-14
Editing Existing Flagging Limits, 8-14

8.12 SETTING UP RULES FOR FLAGGING SAMPLE RESULTS, 8-15

Defining Delta Check Criteria, 8-17
Defining Reflex Manager Criteria, 8-17
Setting Up the Rule Environment, 8-18
Reflex Manager, 8-18
Delta Check, 8-18

8.13 SETTING UP REPORTS, 8-18

8.14 SETTING UP INSTITUTION DETAILS, 8-19

8.15 SETTING UP LIS / HIS COMMUNICATIONS, 8-20

Setting Up Auto Validation, 8-21
Enable Auto Validation Codes, 8-23

8.16 CHANGING AN INSTRUMENT NAME, 8-23

8.17 REVIEWING WORKSTATION SETTINGS, 8-24

8.18 SETTING UP USER ACCESS LEVELS, 8-24

Changing a User's Access Level, 8-25
Changing Your Password, 8-25
Resetting a Password, 8-26

8.19 CHANGE PHYSICIAN LIST, 8-27

8.20 CHANGE LOCATION LIST, 8-27

x PN 624602A
 CONTENTS

8.21 SETTING UP DATABASE STORAGE LIMITS, 8-27

Setting Up Screen Saver, 8-27
Setting Up Colors, 8-28
Setting Up Date and Time, 8-28
Setting Up Your Default Printer, 8-29
Setting Up a New Printer, 8-29
Network Printer, 8-29
Local Printer, 8-30

8.22 RUN CONFIGURATION WINDOW, 8-30

Changing Your Default Printout Format, 8-31
Changing Your Default Report Layout, 8-31
Setting Up Which Results to Print Automatically, 8-32
Setting Up Which Results to Transmit Automatically, 8-32
Turning AutoStop OFF/ON, 8-32
Turning Decision Criteria OFF/ON, 8-33
Turning AutoNumbering OFF/ON, 8-33
Turning AutoCollation OFF/ON, 8-33
Turning XB Analysis OFF/ON, 8-34
Specifying Default Control Lot Numbers, 8-34
Changing the Active Printer, 8-34

9 TROUBLESHOOTING, 9-1

9.1 HAZARDS, 9-1

LASER SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, 9-1
GENERAL LASER SAFETY WARNINGS, 9-1
WARNING LABELS, 9-1

9.2 DRAINAGE AND WASTE DISPOSAL, 9-4

Drainage, 9-4

9.3 CALIBRATION OVERVIEW, 9-5

When to Calibrate, 9-5

9.4 TROUBLESHOOTING OVERVIEW, 9-5

Data Review, 9-5
Specimen-Related Problems, 9-6
Instrument Problems, 9-6
Workstation Troubleshooting, 9-6
Electronic Troubleshooting, 9-6
Indicators, 9-6
Correcting Electronic Problems, 9-6
Pneumatic/Hydraulic Troubleshooting, 9-6
Pinched Tubing, 9-7
Plug, 9-7
Leak, 9-7
Defective Components, 9-7
Correcting Pneumatic/Hydraulic Problems, 9-7
Reagent Troubleshooting, 9-7
Correcting Reagent Problems, 9-7

PN 624602A xi
CONTENTS

9.5 CLEAR FLOW CELL CLOG, 9-7

Error Messages:, 9-8
PC1 - Partial Clog 1, 9-8
PC2 - Partial Clog 2, 9-8
FC - Full Clog, 9-8
Clearing Procedure:, 9-8

9.6 INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES, 9-11

9.7 WORKSTATION PC ERRORS, 9-36

10 DATABASE AND TODO LIST, 10-1

10.1 DATABASE & TODO WINDOW, 10-1

Columns You May Not Understand, 10-1
Finding and Sorting, 10-1
Selecting, 10-1
Transmitting, Printing and Archiving, 10-2
Other Actions, 10-2

10.2 COMMON FUNCTIONS (OVERVIEW), 10-2

Transmitting Results, 10-2
Printing Reports, 10-3
Archiving Data, 10-3
Deleting Data, 10-3
Deleting Patient Data, 10-3
Deleting Sample Information, 10-3
Printing, 10-4
Printing Help Topics, 10-4
What Prints When You Select , 10-5
Run Configuration Application, 10-5
Patient Application, 10-5
Quality Assurance Application, 10-5
Setup Application, 10-5
History Log Application, 10-5
Status Application, 10-5
Color Printouts, 10-6
Archiving, 10-6
Reviewing Archived Information, 10-6
Understanding the Information, 10-7
Transmitting, 10-7
Transmitting Control Records, 10-7

10.3 SAVING SAMPLE RESULTS, 10-7

10.4 ADDING A SAMPLE REQUEST TO THE TODO LIST, 10-8

Adding a Test to an Existing Set of Sample Results, 10-9

10.5 DATABASE OVERVIEW, 10-9

How Overwriting and DataBase Storage Work for Sample Results, 10-9
DataBase Storage Limits and Saving Results, 10-10

xii PN 624602A
 CONTENTS

10.6 TODO LIST OVERVIEW, 10-10

Setting Up AutoSequencing, 10-11

10.7 COLLATION OVERVIEW, 10-12

How Collation Works, 10-12
Printing Collated Reports, 10-12

10.8 SEARCHING FOR RESULTS OVERVIEW, 10-12

Searching with Wildcards, 10-12
If you want to find a specific group of samples, 10-12
Results of a Search, 10-13
Search Criteria, 10-13

10.9 FINDING SAMPLE RESULTS USING THE DATABASE EXPLORER

BUTTON, 10-13
Using a Search Criteria Name, 10-14
Saving Search Criteria, 10-14

10.10 VIEWING DATABASE COUNT INFORMATION, 10-15

APPENDIX A, A-1

A.1 TUBE LIST, A-1

BECTON DICKINSON Glass Tubes with HEMOGARD Closure, A-1
BECTON DICKINSON Plastic Tubes with HEMOGARD Closure, A-1
COULTER Tubes, A-1
GREINER VACUETTE™ Tubes, A-2
KABE, A-2
LABCO Exetainer™ Tubes, A-2
LABO EXPRESS SERVICE (LES), A-2
LDM, A-2
LIP, A-2
SARSTEDT, A-3
SHERWOOD MEDICAL, A-3
TERUMO TUBES, A-3
TERUMO VENOJECT™ Tubes, A-3
TERUMO VENOJECT II Foil Top, A-3

APPENDIX B, B-1

B.1 BAR-CODE READER, B-1

Description, B-1
Settings and Defaults, B-1

B.2 BAR-CODE SYMBOLOGY OVERVIEW, B-1

Character Set, B-2
Symbology Type, B-2
Fixed or Variable Length, B-2
Self-Checking, B-2
Start Code, Stop Code, B-2
Check Character, Checksum Algorithm, B-2
Quiet Zone, Quiet Area, B-2

PN 624602A xiii
CONTENTS

B.3 BAR-CODES AND THE LH 700 Series, B-2

Checksum Algorithm, B-3
Bar-code Symbologies Supported by the LH 700 Series, B-3
Interleaved 2-of-5, B-3
Code 39 (Also called 3-of-9 Code), B-3
Codabar, B-3
NW-7, B-3
Code 128/USS 128, B-3
Bar-code Tips, B-4

B.4 BAR-CODE LABEL SPECIFICATIONS, B-4

Handheld Scanner, B-4
General, B-4
Optical Characteristics at 880 nm ±10% and 633 nm ±10%, B-4
Printing Method, B-5
Label Thickness, B-5
NE/WE Ratio, B-5
Label Dimensions and Data, B-5
Acceptable Bar-codes, B-7
Checksum Algorithm, B-8
Interleaved 2-of-5, B-8
Codabar and NW7, B-8
Japan Red Cross NW7 Decoding, B-9
Code 39® Bar-code, B-11
Code 128, B-12

REFERENCES, REFERENCES-1

INDEX, INDEX-1

TRADEMARKS

xiv PN 624602A
 CONTENTS

ILLUSTRATIONS
1.1 COULTER LH 500, 1-1
7.1 Coulter Method, 7-1
7.2 FlowCell, 7-2
7.3 Loading Bay, 7-3
7.4 Aspiration Pump, 7-4
7.5 Waste Chamber, 7-5
7.6 BSV (CBC delivery), 7-6
7.7 Reagent Pump, 7-7
7.8 WBC Bath, 7-7
7.9 Flow Cell Aperture, 7-8
7.10 Sweep Flow, 7-10
7.11 DF 1 Scatterplot, 7-12
7.12 Retic Population, 7-12
9.1 Laser Safety Label, 9-1
9.2 Safety Labels on the TTM, 9-2
9.3 Laser Safety Labels for Bar-Code Reader on the LH 500 Hematology Analyzer, 9-3
9.4 Laser Safety Labels for LH 500 Power Sources, 9-3
2.1 Bar-Code Label Specifications, B-6

PN 624602A xv
CONTENTS

TABLES
1.1 CLIA Complexity Table, 1-2
1.2 Sample Stability, Room Temperature, 1-15
1.3 Sample Stability, Cold Temperature, 1-16
1.4 Reference Ranges, 1-18
9.1 Instrument Error Messages, 9-11
9.2 Workstation PC Errors, 9-36
2.1 Bar-Code Label Specifications, B-6
2.2 Code-Related Specifications, B-7

xvi PN 624602A
 INTRODUCTION

This introductory section contains the following topics:

r How to use your COULTER® LH 500 Series System hard-copy manuals

r About this manual
r Online Help System
r Conventions

HOW TO USE YOUR COULTER® LH 500 SERIES SYSTEM HARD-COPY MANUALS

Use the Getting Started booklet to see an overview of the system hardware and software. This
document comes with your LH 500 Series System.

Use the Reference manual for descriptions and figures of the main system components; its
specifications; information on installation; and software options. The Reference manual for
the LH 500 Series System is included in the online Help system; it is available in hard copy by
request.
Use the Special Procedures manual to run calibration and to clean, replace or adjust a
component on the instrument. This document is made up of procedures from the online Help
system; it is available in hard copy by request.

Use the Instructions for Use manual for the day-to-day operation of your instrument. This
document is made up of procedures from the online Help system; it includes Startup; running
controls and samples; reviewing data; Operation Principles; troubleshooting; Shutdown; and
the software on the Workstation. This document is available in hard copy by request.
Use the Master Index to easily locate a subject in your hard-copy Reference manual,
Instructions for Use manual or Special Procedures manual. The Master Index comes with the
hard copy of both the Instructions for Use manual and the Special Procedures manual.
Use the Host Transmission Specification to find the information needed to program the
transmission interface between the LH 500 Series System and your laboratory’s host
computer. This document comes with your LH 500 Series System.
See the Documentation page on the back cover of this manual for the contents of each manual.
It can help you to determine quickly in which manual the information you need is located.

PN 624602A xvii
INTRODUCTION
ABOUT THIS MANUAL

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Your LH 500 Series System Instructions for Use manual is a source of information for the
day-to-day operation of your instrument. This information is organized as follows:
s Chapter 1, System Overview
Provides description of controls and indicators on the instrument, intended use and
performance characteristics.
s Chapter 2, Startup
Provides procedures to check the instrument during daily Startup.
s Chapter 3, Quality Control (QC)
Provides procedures for running and reviewing controls.
s Chapter 4, Sample Analysis
Provides description of aspiration and test modes, procedures for collecting and storing
specimens, applying bar-code labels, checking instrument setup, identifying samples and
cycling samples.
s Chapter 5, Data Review
Provides procedures for reviewing, editing and saving results.
s Chapter 6, Shutdown
Provides procedures for shutting down the system.
s Chapter 7, Operation Principles
Provides history of methods, general principles, sample transport and flow, counting and
sizing, and scatterplot development.
s Chapter 8, Setup
Provides procedures for setting up controls, patient environment, physician list, location
list, institution, communications, passwords, control panel and Run Configuration.
s Chapter 9, Troubleshooting
Provides precautions and hazards, maintenance schedule, and error messages for
troubleshooting.
s Chapter 10, DataBase and ToDo List
Provides an overview of the window and the common functions available, and
procedures for reviewing, editing, searching and saving results.
s Appendix A, Tube List
s Appendix B, Bar-Code Specifications
s References
s Index, hard copy only.

xviii PN 624602A
 INTRODUCTION
ONLINE HELP SYSTEM

ONLINE HELP SYSTEM

The Workstation has a comprehensive Online Help System, which includes reference
information, all operating, maintenance and troubleshooting procedures. On the LH 500

Series Workstation, select to access Help. Select to access the tutorials.

CONVENTIONS
This document uses the following conventions:

indicates a key on the Numeric keypad.

indicates a key on the LH 500 Series Workstation keyboard.

is the icon for Patient results on the LH 500 Series Workstation.

is the icon for the Printer on the LH 500 Series Workstation.

PN 624602A xix
INTRODUCTION
CONVENTIONS

xx PN 624602A
 1SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1
1.1 INTENDED USE
The COULTER LH 500 Analyzer is a quantitative, automated hematology analyzer and
leukocyte differential cell counter For In Vitro Diagnostic Use in clinical laboratories. The LH
500 Analyzer also provides a semi-automated reticulocyte analysis.

The purpose of the LH 500 Analyzer is to separate the normal patient, with all normal
system-generated parameters, from the patient who needs additional studies. These studies
include further measurements of cell size and cell distribution, or any other test that helps
diagnose the abormality.

Figure 1.1 COULTER LH 500

Parameters
The systems measure these hematologic parameters of whole-blood specimens:

WBC White Blood Cell (leukocyte) Count

NE% Neutrophil percent
NE# Neutrophil number
LY% Lymphocyte percent
LY# Lymphocyte number
MO% Monocyte percent
MO# Monocyte number
EO% Eosinophil percent
EO# Eosinophil number
BA% Basophil percent
BA# Basophil number
RBC Red Blood Cell (erythrocyte) count
Hgb Hemoglobin concentration
Hct Hematocrit
MCV Mean Corpuscular Volume

PN 624602A 1-1
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
INTENDED USE

MCH Mean Corpuscular Hemoglobin

MCHC Mean Corpuscular Hemoglobin Concentration
RDW Red Cell Distribution Width
Plt Platelet count
MPV Mean Platelet Volume
*PDW Platelet Distribution Width
*Pct Plateletcrit
RET% Reticulocyte percent
RET# Reticulocyte number
MRV Mean Reticulocyte Volume
IRF Immature Reticulocyte Fraction

*In the USA, the PDW and Pct parameters are Not for Diagnostic Use. The value for PDW is
used as an internal check on the reported platelet parameters Plt and MPV.1, 2, 3

Unless otherwise stated, all parameter results are shown in the US unit format throughout the
manuals.

CLIA Complexity Categories

See Table_1.1 for the CLIA complexity categories of the LH 500 Hematology Analyzer.

Table 1.1 CLIA Complexity Table

Analyte

Hematocrit (Hct) Moderate

Hemoglobin (Hgb) Moderate

Platelet count (Plt) Moderate

Red blood cell count, erythrocyte count (RBC) Moderate

Reticulocyte Moderate

White blood cell count, leukocyte count (WBC) Moderate

White blood cell differential, (WBC Diff) Moderate

Mean Reticulocyte Volume (MRV) Moderate

Immature Reticulocyte Fraction (IRF) Moderate

1-2 PN 624602A
 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
LH 500 SERIES SYSTEM 1
1.2 LH 500 SERIES SYSTEM
LH 500 Front View

Note: The above diagram is shown with the Needle Shield removed.

Lytic Reagent Pumps Angar Valve

RBC Aperture Bath Vacuum Isolators

WBC Aperture Bath Hemoglobin Lamp

PN 624602A 1-3
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
LH 500 SERIES SYSTEM

StabiLyse Pump Mixing Chamber

Sample Valve (BSV) Rinse Block

Rinse Block Loading Bay

Right Elevator Needle Cartridge

Needle Forward Sensor (under Needle Cartridge) Tube Pusher

Rocker Bed Standby/Reset Switch

Tube Available Sensor Left Elevator

Guide Rail Bed Springs

1-4 PN 624602A
 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
LH 500 SERIES SYSTEM 1
LH 500 Left Side View

Fuse Panel

See Hazards topic for any relevant safety warnings.

PN 624602A 1-5
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
LH 500 SERIES SYSTEM

LH 500 Rear View

Power (On/Off) Switch

See Hazards topic for any relevant safety warnings.

1-6 PN 624602A
 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
LH 500 SERIES SYSTEM 1
LH 500 Right Side View

Vacuum Regulator Solenoid Panel

WBC Diluent Pump RBC Diluent Pump

30 psi Adjustment Knob Vacuum Trap

Pinch Valve Sample Pressure Adjustment Knob

Sheath Pressure Adjustment Knob

PN 624602A 1-7
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
LH 500 SERIES SYSTEM

Workstation

CAUTION Possible system damage

could occur if the LH 500 Series
Workstation is used to operate
personal software that has not been
authorized for use by Beckman Coulter.
Only use software that is authorized by
Beckman Coulter.

The Workstation:

r Stores and recalls sample data

r Automates QC and calibration
procedures
r Assists you in troubleshooting.

Workstation (Back View)

1-8 PN 624602A
 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
LH 500 SERIES SYSTEM 1
Workstation Keyboard

You can use the keyboard as an

alternate method of interacting with
the Workstation. Press

to access Help

to access the menu bar

to move between fields

to move within a field.

CD ROM Drive

Your Workstation comes with two Compact Disk

drives: one that is a Read-Only Memory disk drive
to read data from a CD ROM disk; and a second
one to read/write data. Either CD-ROM can hold
text, graphics and hi-fi stereo sound.

3.5-inch Diskette Drive

Use this diskette drive for inserting diskettes into

the Workstation PC to set up files for your 5C®
Series cell control or S-CAL™ Calibrator diskettes.

PN 624602A 1-9
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
USING COMMAND CENTER

Power On/Off (Workstation)

Before turning the Workstation off, you should

try to shut down the Workstation to avoid loss
of any data. If you cannot shut down the
Workstation, turn the Workstation off, wait 30
seconds and restart the Workstation.

Press this button to turn the Workstation on or

off.

1.3 USING COMMAND CENTER

The LH 500 Series Workstation always appears with a light green Command Center at the
bottom of the screen. This area provides quick access to functions and system status.

Select one of the following blue phrases to obtain information about an area on the Command
Center:

r Buttons
r Process Type field
r Bar-Code ID field
r Status area
r Predilute and Factor
r Run Type field
r User field
r Aspiration Mode
r Blood Detector

Application Buttons
The buttons on the Command Center enable you to access major Workstation functions:

Select To Access
Run Configuration application where you can quickly change defaults for
workflow preferences.

Patient application where you can review, report and modify existing patient
sample results and add new patient sample requests.

Quality Assurance application where you can review results for the various
quality assurance methods, such as controls, XB and calibration.

System Setup application where you can customize your LH 500 Series
Workstation to your laboratory workflow preferences, such as flagging limits
and decision rules.

1-10 PN 624602A
 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
USING COMMAND CENTER 1
History Log Viewer application where you can review and comment on
messages posted to various electronic logbooks that identify history.

System Status application where you can view current details about the system.

The Shutdown Type window so you can logoff or shutdown your Workstation.

Starts system

Stops system to change modes

Process Type
This field displays the current processing of the sample analysis data received from the
instrument. The instrument must be in a stop state before the process type can be changed.

To change the process type:

1. Select for the process type.

2. Select the type of processing you want for the instrument:

Select For Results Considered As From

AUTO ANALYSIS Any automatic identification of the type of run. This includes all
patient and bar-coded control analyses.
REPRODUCIBILITY Reproducibility analysis.
BACKGROUND Performs a count on clean diluent. Note: Only available after
startup.
CARRYOVER Carryover analysis.
CALIBRATION Calibration analysis.
CONTROL Non bar-coded control analysis.
STARTUP Cycles all reagents and performs Daily Check on instrument.
SHUTDOWN Changes to the enzymatic cleaning agent.
Note: If a tube does not have a bar-code label and the results are to be sent to a specific
Control Folder, select CONTROL and select the target Control Folder Lot Number using
the Default Cell Control field on the Run Configuration screen.

The next time the Workstation receives data from the instrument, it stores it in the database
according to your selection.

PN 624602A 1-11
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
USING COMMAND CENTER

Bar-Code ID
1. Select this field.
2. Use the handheld scanner to scan the sample ID for the next sample cycled in Manual
aspiration mode or perform the following procedure:
a. Using the Workstation keyboard, type a sample ID that you want used for the next
Enter

sample cycled in Manual aspiration mode, and then press .

IMPORTANT Risk of missing identifier. If you fail to send the sample ID to the instrument within 90
seconds of data entry in the Bar-code ID field, the sample ID provided is cleared. This minimizes the risk of
sample misidentification.

Status Area
Graphics appear in this area to provide status about the system.

This Means
The system is functioning properly. (GREEN)

The system recognized an event that might have caused it to stop processing,
but the automatic stop option was turned off. Check for additional status
graphics to indicate the nature of the event. You can also check the History
Logs for detailed messages. (YELLOW)

The system encountered an event that caused it to stop processing. This

could be due to an automatic stop option or error condition. Check for
additional status graphics to indicate the nature of the event. You can also
check the History Logs for detailed messages. (RED)

When an event causes the system to stop processing, double-click on the

traffic light to display the Status dialog box. Place the cursor over an entry in
the Status box to display additional information. Double-click on an entry in
the Status box if you want to display the error message help topic for that
event.

Select to ackowledge the event and continue processing.

The Review folder contains one or more samples.

1-12 PN 624602A
 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
USING COMMAND CENTER 1
An Analytical Station attached to the Workstation stopped processing and
sent a message to the Workstation that it should stop. Check the History Logs
for detailed messages.
The database is functioning improperly. Shut down and restart the
Workstation. If the problem persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
Last control results were outside the defined limits. Check the History Logs
for detailed messages.

Last batch of XB results was outside the defined limits. Check the History
Logs for detailed messages.

The Remote Communication Service (RCS) is enabled.

Predilute and Factor

indicates that the sample being processed requires dilution correction. Once checked, a
dialog box displays; enter a multiplication factor (1.0 to 5.0). The system applies the
designated multiplication factor to the data to correct the values of the diluted sample.

Example: When processing a sodium citrate tube to obtain a platelet count, set the dilutional
correction to 1.1.

Measured parameters RBC, HGB, WBC, and PLT are multiplied by the factor before
calculating the other parameters. HCT, MCH, MCHC and PCT will reflect the multiplier since
they are calculated from the four measured parameters.

Once the sample has been processed, the dilution factor returns to the default of 1.0.

Note: This feature can be used only in Manual Mode and will only run in CBC Mode.

Rule Type
These fields appear gray and inactive when you edit an existing rule.

identifies the type of rule you want to create. Select the type of rule you want to create:

Select This For Sample Results You Want

Reflex Manager Displayed with a specific message in the
Review Folder or the Reflex Manager Folder
Delta Check Compared to previous sample results that
exist in the database. These results can appear
in the Review Folder or the Delta Check
Folder.

PN 624602A 1-13
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
CASSETTE HANDLING

User
This field is a non-editable box that displays the current user ID.

Aspiration Mode
The mode (Automatic or Manual) used to aspirate the sample. The Workstation obtains this
information from the instrument, and you cannot edit it.

If the sample has not yet been cycled, this field appears blank.

Enabling/Disabling Blood Detector

1. Blood detectors will automatically become enabled after one aspiration.

2. To disable the Blood Detector, uncheck the box next to the blood detector on the
Command Center.
Note: The system flags all parameters with a P (partial aspiration) when samples are analyzed
with blood detectors disabled. P flagged control run results are automatically removed from
statistical calculations; there is no method to reintroduce the flagged runs into calculations.

1.4 CASSETTE HANDLING

The cassette is the carrier for the sample tubes

(patient, control, or special test) used in
Automatic aspiration mode where automatic
loading, mixing, and sampling occurs.

Tubes should be pushed into the cassette with

the tube bar-code labels facing up.

Always hold the cassette firmly by its edges. Do

not try to hold or lift a cassette by grabbing a
tube. The weight of the remaining tubes could
cause the cassette to fall.

Cleaning the Cassette

Wash the cassettes as needed in warm soapy water and rinse thoroughly. Do not use an
abrasive. Keep the cassettes free of dried blood, bleach, or diluent. Be careful not to scratch or
deface the bar-code labels. Dirt, smears, pencil lead, and grease can affect bar-code label
reading.

1-14 PN 624602A
 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PRINTER 1
1.5 PRINTER
The LH 500 Series can print to any printer supported by Microsoft Windows® 2000 and
connected to your Workstation. You attach the printer to the back of your computer using a
printer cable. After attaching your printer, you must also set up your printer at the
Workstation.

If you have problems with your printer, read the documentation that came with your printer,
or contact the manufacturer of the printer.

1.6 STANDBY/RESET SWITCH

To reset the system:

1. Put the Standby/Reset switch in the

STANDBY position.
2. Wait 15 seconds.
3. Return the Standby/Reset switch to
the READY position.

1.7 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

Characteristics
The information in this section describes typical performance for an instrument that has been
properly maintained as indicated in the COULTER LH 500 Series documentation, using the
recommended reagents.

Sample Stability
The following tables show the average results for specimens from five normal donors
collected in K3EDTA. The specimens were stored at room temperature and cold temperature.
For this study, room temperature was 70 - 75ºF (21-24ºC) and cold temperature was 37 -
39ºF (3-4ºC). Room temperature specimens were mixed for 22 inversions and then
immediately analyzed. Upon removal from the refrigerator, the cold specimens were mixed
for 22 complete inversions and analyzed within five minutes.

Table 1.2 Sample Stability, Room Temperature

*T:1 hour T:4 hours T:8 hours T:24 hours T:48 hours

WBC 5.84 5.81 5.82 5.67 5.62

RBC 4.481 4.537 4.471 4.488 4.477

PN 624602A 1-15
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

Table 1.2 Sample Stability, Room Temperature (Continued)

HGB 13.97 14.09 14.03 14.00 13.95

HCT 39.95 40.53 40.18 40.78 41.34

MCV 89.28 89.48 89.96 91 92.52

MCH 31.27 31.15 31.49 31.27 31.24

MCHC 35.01 34.80 35.02 34.37 33.78

RDW 12.27 12.29 12.47 12.84 13.31

PLT 229.74 234.68 227.3 230.8 231.28

MPV 8.63 8.83 8.97 9.18 9.91

NE% 59.88 59.66 60.7 60.9 63.58

LY% 28.94 29.4 28.58 28.84 27.78

MO% 8.08 7.7 7.8 7.26 5.96

EO% 2.62 2.74 2.36 2.5 2.34

BA% 0.48 0.5 0.56 0.5 0.34

NE# 3.46 3.48 3.56 3.44 3.56

LY# 1.7 1.72 1.66 1.66 1.58

MO# 0.5 0.44 0.46 0.42 0.34

EO# 0.16 0.16 0.12 0.14 0.14

BA# 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

Retic % 2.428 1.992 2.482 2.248 1.9

MRV 95.14 102.66 97.22 104.66 106.02

IRF 21.58 21.56 19.54 19.52 20.4

*Results for T1 at Room Temperature for comparison

Table 1.3 Sample Stability, Cold Temperature

*T:1 hour T:4 hours T:8 hours T:24 hours T:48 hours

WBC 5.84 5.81 5.77 5.56 5.59

RBC 4.481 4.515 4.476 4.532 4.501

HGB 13.97 14.11 13.99 14.06 14.03

HCT 39.95 40.21 40.08 40.53 40.65

MCV 89.28 89.22 89.66 89.60 90.48

MCH 31.27 31.33 31.35 31.12 31.26

1-16 PN 624602A
 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS 1
Table 1.3 Sample Stability, Cold Temperature

MCHC 35.01 35.12 34.97 34.73 34.56

RDW 12.27 12.31 12.39 12.31 12.25

PLT 229.74 228.42 225.40 219.34 215.66

MPV 8.63 8.60 8.76 8.78 9.06

NE% 59.88 60.20 60.36 59.26 56.78

LY% 28.94 29.20 28.88 29.16 30.38

MO% 8.08 7.64 7.62 8.62 10.04

EO% 2.62 2.46 2.74 2.58 2.48

BA% 0.48 0.50 0.40 0.38 0.32

NE# 3.46 3.52 3.50 3.38 3.20

LY# 1.7 1.68 1.66 1.62 1.68

MO# 0.5 0.44 0.44 0.46 0.58

EO# 0.16 0.14 0.16 0.12 0.14

BA# 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

Retic % 2.428 2.364 3.096 2.804 2.964

MRV 95.14 100.98 96.72 100.84 99.14

IRF 21.58 22.18 23.58 23.64 21.08

*Results for T1 at Room Temperature for comparison

WBC Differential Flagging Stability

The specimens were stored at room temperature and cold temperature. For this study, room
temperature was 72 - 73ºF (22-23ºC) and cold temperature was 37 - 39ºF (3-4ºC). Room
temperature specimens were mixed for 22 inversions and then immediately analyzed. Upon
removal from the refrigerator, the cold specimens were mixed for 22 complete inversions and
analyzed within five minutes.

No suspect flags were present on the specimens up to 24 hours at room temperature and up
to 48 hours at cold temperature

PN 624602A 1-17
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

Reference Ranges
A Normal Range study was conducted to assess the Reference Ranges for the LH 500 Series.
Whole-blood samples were collected from 123 donors (males and females). The selection of
donors was consistent with guidelines stated in NCCLS, C28-A.

Table 1.4 Reference Ranges

95% Confidence 95% Confidence

Parameter Units Sex Mean Low Limit High Limit

WBC x10 3 cells/µL M/F 5.94 4.07 9.32

RBC x 10 6 cells/µL M/F 4.56 3.80 5.33

HGB g/dL M/F 13.65 11.85 15.80

HCT % M/F 39.89 34.24 45.58

MCV fL M/F 87.72 77.80 96.90

MCH pg M/F 30.07 25.87 34.21

MCHC g/dL M/F 34.25 32.58 35.68

RDW % M/F 12.52 11.43 14.38

PLT x10 3 cells/µL M/F 253.41 172.80 401.80

MPV fL M/F 8.86 7.44 10.26

NE % M/F 57.90 41.40 72.60

LY % M/F 30.10 17.40 45.40

MO % M/F 8.17 4.50 13.50

EO % M/F 2.99 0.50 9.50

BA % M/F 0.49 0.10 1.10

NE x10 3 cells/µL M/F 3.48 2.20 6.40

LY x10 3 cells/µL M/F 1.76 1.10 2.90

MO x10 3 cells/µL M/F 0.48 0.20 0.80

EO x10 3 cells/µL M/F 0.18 0.00 0.70

BA x10 3 cells/µL M/F 0.01 0.00 0.10

RET % M/F 1.87 0.92 3.20

MRV fL M/F 100.41 90.20 112.10

IRF % M/F 21.98 13.90 31.30

Known Interfering Substances and Conditions

A salt of EDTA is the preferred anticoagulant. Beckman Coulter used K3EDTA for the data
collection and verification of claims. Use of other anticoagulants can yield misleading results.

1-18 PN 624602A
 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS 1
The presence of certain interfering substances, as listed in this section, can also yield
misleading results.

ALL
Misleading results can occur if the specimen is not properly collected, stored or transported.
Beckman Coulter, Inc. recommends that you follow NCCLS or equivalent procedures to
ensure proper specimen collection, storage and transport. Always follow manufacturer's
recommendations when using microcollection devices for capillary specimen collection.

Misleading results can occur if specimens contain clots. Always use good laboratory practices
for inspecting specimens for clots and verifying results.

Misleading results can occur if the specimen is not properly mixed. Always use good
laboratory practices to ensure specimens are appropriately mixed. Do not bypass or
circumvent the automated mixing process used on the LH 500 Series.

WBC
Certain unusual RBC abnormalities that resist lysing, nucleated RBCs, fragmented WBCs,
agglutinated WBCs, any unlysed particles greater than 35 fL, very large or aggregated platelets
as when anticoagulated with oxalate or heparin, specimens containing fibrin, cell fragments,
or other debris such as pediatric and oncology specimens.41, 42, 43, 44 NRBCs, giant platelets,
platelet clumps, malarial parasites, precipitated elevated proteins, microlymphoblasts, very
small lymphocytes, fragmented white cells, agglutinated white cells, lyse resistant red cells,
unlysed particles > 35 fL in size.

RBC
Very high WBC count, high concentration of very large platelets, agglutinated RBCs, RBCs
smaller than 36 fL, specimens containing fibrin, cell fragments, or other debris such as
pediatric and oncology specimens.45, 46

Hgb
Very high WBC count, severe lipemia, heparin, certain unusual RBC abnormalities that resist
lysing, or anything that increases the turbidity of the sample such as elevated levels of
triglycerides.47

MCV
Very high WBC count, high concentration of very large platelets, agglutinated RBCs, RBC
fragments that fall below the 36-fL threshold, or rigid RBCs.48, 49, 50, 51

RDW
Very high WBC count, high concentration of very large or clumped platelets as in blood
anticoagulated with oxalate or heparin, RBCs below the 36-fL threshold, two distinct
populations of RBCs, RBC agglutinates, or rigid RBCs.52, 53, 54, 55

Plt
Very small red blood cells near the upper threshold, cell fragments, clumped platelets as with
oxalate or heparin, platelet fragments, or cellular debris near the lower platelet

PN 624602A 1-19
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

threshold.56,_57,_58,_59 Giant platelets, platelet clumps, white cell fragments, electronic noise,
very small red cells, red cell fragments.

MPV
Known factors that interfere with the Plt count and shape of the histogram or known effects
of EDTA.60, 61, 62, 63

Hct
Known factors that interfere with the parameters used for computation: RBC and MCV.

MCH
Known factors that interfere with the parameters used for computation: Hgb and RBC.

MCHC
Known factors that interfere with the parameters used for computation: Hgb, RBC and MCV.

Diff Parameters
Known factors that affect the WBC count as listed above or high triglycerides that affect
lysing.64 Hypogranular granulocytes, agranular granulocytes, lyse resistant red cells, very
small or multi-population lymphocytes, elevated triglycerides, precipitated elevated proteins.

Reticulocytes
Erythrocyte inclusions stained by New Methylene Blue, if sufficiently numerous within a
sample, and some hemoglobinopathies (SS, SC) might affect the accuracy of the reticulocyte
enumeration.65

1-20 PN 624602A
 2STARTUP 2
2.1 LOGGING OFF/ON THE WORKSTATION
Logging OFF

1. Select on the Command Center to display the Log Off window.

2. Select to confirm that you want to log off the current user name and display the
Log On window.

Logging ON
1. Type your user name that was defined by your laboratory administrator.
2. Type your password that was defined by your laboratory administrator. If you forget your
password, contact your laboratory administrator. Your laboratory administrator can reset
your password.

3. Select . The Workstation checks your password and starts the appropriate
applications.

2.2 PERFORMING DAILY STARTUP

The STARTUP Process Type cycles diluent throughout the LH 500 Series Analyzer and
performs a Daily Check of the system.

1. On the Command Center, select STARTUP as the process type.

2. Press .
3. If autoprint has been turned ON, startup results will automatically print.
4. To review your results, go to the Check Daily Test Results screen.
5. If background fails, on the command center select BACKGROUND as the process type
and repeat.

Note: BACKGROUND Process Type only appears immediately following a STARTUP.

6. If any other Daily Checks fail, repeat STARTUP or perform the System Test.
7. Print the results for your instrument log.

2.3 PERFORMING THE DAILY CLEAN CYCLE

Note: This procedure requires that the Instrument interface is displayed.

The Clean Cycle can be used in place of the regular Shutdown cycle. This function switches
the instrument to cleaning agent, waits 30 minutes and then automatically performs a Startup
cycle.

1. Select Diluter Functions Clean.

PN 624602A 2-1
STARTUP
CHECKING DAILY TEST RESULTS

2. The message Clean Cycle in progress. This cycle takes approximately 35 minutes. Please
wait is displayed. The Diluter changes the instrument to use cleaner, which takes
approximately two minutes. The system then waits for 30 minutes prior to the startup
cycle.
3. Verify your Daily Checks information.

2.4 CHECKING DAILY TEST RESULTS

1. Select on the Command Center to display the Quality Assurance application.

2. If necessary, select to display the daily startup test results.

3. If you want to see past startup test results:

a. Select .
b. Select a row indicating the date, time and type of test results you want to see. The
results appear on the window.
Note: Select only 1 row. Daily Checks results will not be displayed if you select more
than 1 row of results.
4. Check the reagent status, background status and subsystem status for any items that
failed.

5. Select to see startup test details.

6. Take appropriate action to resolve any failed items.

2.5 CHECKING BACKGROUND TEST RESULTS

1. Select to display the Quality Assurance application.

2. If necessary, select to display the Daily Checks window.

3. Review the results on the window. If results appear with a red background, they are
unacceptable.

4. Select to see the specific results for electronic, pressure/vacuum, Hgb voltage, and
temperature readings.

2.6 CHECKING HGB VOLTAGE TEST RESULTS

1. Select to display the Quality Assurance application.

2-2 PN 624602A
 STARTUP
CHECKING HGB VOLTAGE TEST RESULTS 2

2. If necessary, select to display the Daily Checks window.

3. Review the results on the window.

4. Select to see the Hgb voltage results.

PN 624602A 2-3
STARTUP
CHECKING HGB VOLTAGE TEST RESULTS

2-4 PN 624602A
 3QUALITY CONTROL 3
3.1 QUALITY CONTROL OVERVIEW
Quality control includes monitoring routine performance and service in conjunction with the
use of controls and calibrators. You should routinely check results between quality control
analyses. The combination of these methods provides the assurance of complete quality
control.

The LH 500 Series incorporates multiple quality control techniques. For the CBC, CBC/DIFF
and RETIC parameters, the LH 500 Series uses the established technique of commercial
controls. The LH 500 Series uses a stabilized particle suspension, such as LATRON, to verify
flow cell alignment, gains, and CVs for flow cell volume, conductivity and light scatter. The
Workstation stores information about the control setup and control results in the DataBase.

The LH 500 Series also allows you to customize the way the Workstation displays control
results. Your laboratory can establish acceptance limits for control results based on the
control source, type and level, as well as the aspiration mode. This can help you better
understand control results and interpret them more quickly.

Beckman Coulter recommends that Quality Control checks be performed using patient or
commercial controls in both automatic (primary) and manual (secondary) modes at intervals
established by your lab. When using a commercial control, refer to the package insert to
determine which mode to use. Failure to recover Control values within your lab's expected
limits or the presence of unexplained shifts or trends in either mode of analysis should be
investigated. If Control problems in either mode cannot be resolved, call your Beckman
Coulter Representative.

3.2 RUNNING LATEX CONTROL—DIFF AND RETIC

1. Check that the instrument process type on the Command Center is set to CONTROL.
On the Command Center, select Ltx Primer in the run type field.
Ensure the latex primer and control are within the correct temperature range. For
COULTER LATRON primer and control the correct temperature range is
18-30°C/64-86°F.

2. Press to prepare the instrument for aspiration.

3. Verify the lot number of the latex control. If you must use a new lot number, ensure that
it has been set up properly.

CAUTION Possible system damage could occur if you aspirate anything except latex control or latex
primer using this function. Do not aspirate any other materials with this function.

4. Remove the cap of the latex primer vial.

5. Immerse the aspirator tip in the latex primer vial and press the aspiration bar. The
instrument aspirates the RETIC+DIFF primer.
6. Remove the vial from the aspirator tip when you hear a beep and the Analyzer Status line
displays PREPARING SAMPLE. The probe cleaner retracts the aspirator and automatically
cleans it.
7. At the Workstation, check the results from the primer.

PN 624602A 3-1
QUALITY CONTROL
CYCLING CONTROLS IN RETIC MODE

8. Press .
9. Select LATEX in the Run Type field.

10. Press to prepare the instrument for aspiration.

11. Gently mix the latex control according to the directions in the package insert.
12. Immerse the aspirator tip in the latex control vial and press the aspiration bar. The
instrument aspirates the control.
13. At the Workstation, verify the results from the control.

3.3 CYCLING CONTROLS IN RETIC MODE

Retic-C® cell control is a hematology reference control that monitors Beckman Coulter
systems with reticulocyte technology using VCS. Use Retic-C cell controls, Levels I, II, III
with the ReticPrep® Reagent Kit.

Retic Control Preparation

CAUTION Running whole blood or control through the aspirate probe while in the Retic mode can damage
the system. Perform the pre-prep procedures according to the instructions below.

IMPORTANT Modifications to the pre-prep procedures or failure to follow these instructions may lead to
misleading or erroneous results. Perform the pre-prep procedures according to the instructions below.

IMPORTANT Misleading results can occur if Retic-C cell control is not prepared properly. Follow the
procedure on the package insert to properly warm, mix and prepare Retic-C cell control for anlysis.

1. Make sure:
a. Dispenser is fitted securely to the
Reagent B bottle.
b. Reagent fills the clear tubing
without any bubbles.

2. For each control tested, label two test

tubes: "A" and "B."

3-2 PN 624602A
 QUALITY CONTROL
CYCLING CONTROLS IN RETIC MODE 3

IMPORTANT Dispensing Reagent A at an angle changes the dilution of the preparation. Dispense the
drops of Reagent A vertically.

3. Place four drops of Reagent A into the

test tube labeled "A."

4. Dispense 50 µL of well-mixed sample

into the tube labeled "A." Do not let the
blood run down the sides of the tube.

PN 624602A 3-3
QUALITY CONTROL
CYCLING CONTROLS IN RETIC MODE

5. Gently mix tube "A." Note: Prepare

other control samples using steps 1
through 5.

6. Let stand for at least 5 minutes at room

temperature. Up to 60 minutes is
allowable.

Retic Control Analysis

1

1. On the Command Center, select

CONTROL or AUTO ANALYSIS as the
process type and R as the run type.

2. Press .

3. Gently mix tube "A" again.

IMPORTANT To ensure accurate results, add the blood-stain mixture directly to the bottom of the tube;
do not allow the blood-stain mixture to run down the sides of the tube. To prevent drying of this small
amount, proceed immediately to the next step.

4. Transfer 2 µL of the control/stain

mixture from tube "A" into the bottom
of tube "B".

3-4 PN 624602A
 QUALITY CONTROL
CYCLING CONTROLS IN RETIC MODE 3

IMPORTANT To ensure accurate results, allow Reagent B to run down the side of the tube so that no
foaming or bubbles occur, but rapidly enough to mix the control/stain mixture and Reagent B. Do not
perform any additional mixing.

5. Dispense Reagent B.
a. Place tube "B" with the
control/stain aliquot at a 30° angle
under the tip of the Reagent B
dispenser.
b. Dispense 2 mL of Reagent B into
the test tube "B". DO NOT MIX.

6. Wait 30 seconds. While you wait, enter

the control lot in the bar-code field,

press .

7. After 30 seconds, analyze the sample.

a. Immerse the aspirator tip into

the retic preparation.
b. Press and release the sample bar.
c. Remove the tube when you hear
the beep.

8. Review control results.

PN 624602A 3-5
QUALITY CONTROL
CYCLING CBC/DIFF CONTROLS IN MANUAL ASPIRATION MODE

3.4 Cycling CBC/Diff Controls in Automatic Aspiration Mode

1. Prepare the controls according to the directions in the package insert.
2. Ensure the controls are properly set up on the Workstation.
Note: If you run a Beckman Coulter control without setting it up, the Workstation
automatically creates control setup information for you. The control information
identifies the lot number, source, type and level of the control.
3. On the Command Center, select AUTO ANALYSIS as the process type if your control
tubes have bar-code labels. See process type if you run controls without bar-code labels.
Select CD as the run type and AUTO as the aspiration mode.

4. Press
5. Load the cassette with the control material.
6. Place the cassette firmly and securely into the loading bay. The instrument begins to
cycle the controls.
7. Review the control results.

3.5 CYCLING CBC/DIFF CONTROLS IN MANUAL ASPIRATION MODE

IMPORTANT If you choose to run 5C Series controls in the manual aspiration mode, you must establish
your own target limits and ranges. The control is assayed for automatic aspiration mode only.

1. Prepare the controls according to the directions in the package insert.

2. Ensure the controls are properly set up on the Workstation.
3. On the Command Center, select AUTO ANALYSIS as the process type; CD as the run
type; and MANUAL as the aspiration mode.
Note: If bar-code window is active, enter the lot number as defined in the control file.

Press . If bar-code window is not active, press .

4. Remove the stopper from the tube.
5. Immerse the aspirator tip in the tube and press the sample bar to begin aspiration.
6. When you hear a beep, remove the tube from the aspirator tip. The probe cleaner retracts
the aspirator and automatically cleans it.
7. At the Workstation, review the control results.

8. Press .

3-6 PN 624602A
 QUALITY CONTROL
CONTROL CODES AND FLAGS 3
3.6 Reviewing Control Results

1. Select on the Command Center to display the Quality Assurance application.

2. Select to display the Controls window.

3. Select the specific control for which you want to review results. The control results table,
statistics and graphs appear on the window. Use the scroll bars on the window to view

other parameter results and graphs. Use to add comments to a control run.
4. If you want to view the results and graphics for a specific latex run:
a. Select the control run you want to view in the table.

b. Select to see the Latex Graphs window.

5. Select:

This To Do This
Adjust assigned values to the current mean values.

Restore the manufacturer’s assigned values and expected

ranges.

3.7 CONTROL CODES AND FLAGS

As appropriate, the LH 500 Series applies instrument-generated and/or laboratory-defined
flags, codes, and/or messages to each set of patient results. Flags, codes, and suspect or
definitive messages are used to alert you to an instrument malfunction, specimen
abnormality, abnormal data pattern, or abnormal results. Beckman Coulter recommends
review, appropriate to the requirements of the patient population, of all results displaying a
flag, code or message.

The following codes appear in place of results when the system cannot obtain results:

PN 624602A 3-7
QUALITY CONTROL
CONTROL CODES AND FLAGS

..... Incomplete computation. When this code occurs for a parameter result it
indicates an incomplete computation due to problems such as data
insufficiency.
When this code appears on all parameter results, it indicates a Power
Supply Failure. Check this condition and rerun the sample.
----- When this code appears for CBC parameter results and no average
histogram appears for the affected parameter, it indicates a total voteout.
If this code appears for WBC, the WBC subpopulation absolute numbers
appear as ..... since they are calculated from the white count and the WBC
result was non-numeric.
+++++ The result exceeds the instrument's reportable range. Follow your
laboratory’s policies for reviewing the sample.

IMPORTANT Incorrect results can occur. If the WBC, RBC, HGB, or PLT have +++++ when cycling in
Manual mode, run a blank cycle before analyzing the next test sample to prevent carryover to the next
sample. When cycling in Automatic mode, rerun the sample immediately following the one with the
+++++. Sample dilutions may also result in wrong differential results. The instrument will automatically set
to CBC mode when predilute is chosen.

::::: The instrument detected a clog in the flow cell. You must clear the clog and
rerun the sample.
????? Invalid data.

The following flags appear to the right of the parameter result:

* Result exceeds instrument's counting threshold. Follow your laboratory's

policies for reviewing the sample. This flag is applicable to MCV only.
+ Result exceeds linearity (reportable) range. Cycle a diluent blank before
proceeding with subsequent samples.
aL Result is lower than your action low limits. Follow your laboratory’s
policies for reviewing the sample.
aH Result is higher than your action high limits. Follow your laboratory’s
policies for reviewing the sample.
cL Result is lower than your critical low limits. It is a critical value and
requires immediate attention. Follow your laboratory’s policies for
reviewing the sample.
cH Result is higher than your critical high limits. It is a critical value and
requires immediate attention. Follow your laboratory’s policies for
reviewing the sample.
D Result triggered a Delta Check rule as defined by your laboratory.
e Result has been calculated from a manually edited parameter. This flag
overwrites +, *, v, V and R flags.
E Result has been edited. This flag overwrites +, *, v, V and R flags.

3-8 PN 624602A
 QUALITY CONTROL
CONTROL CODES AND FLAGS 3
H Result is higher than your reference range. Follow your laboratory’s policies
for reviewing the sample.
L Result is lower than your reference range. Follow your laboratory’s policies
for reviewing the sample.
P Partial aspiration detected.
R Review the result according to your laboratory's protocol. When editing
parameter results, this flag requires special handling. Any parameter
derived from an R-flagged parameter cannot be recalculated until the
parameters with the R flags have been edited.
V Result corresponds to a single count-period voteout.
v Result is a parameter calculated from one with a single count-period
voteout. This flag overwrites +, *, and R flags.

You may want to look at the messages that appear on the Research Data window. The
Research Data window provides more detailed research data.

When a Control is Outside Its Expected Ranges

1. Ensure the control:
r Material was mixed properly. If not, mix it according to the package insert.
r Identification information was entered correctly. If using a bar-code reader, ensure
the bar-code labels are clean and positioned correctly. If using the keyboard, ensure
you typed the correct information.
r Setup information (assigned values and expected ranges) matches the control
package insert. If they do not, change the control’s information to match the
package insert.
2. If any of the problems existed, rerun the control; otherwise, proceed to the next step.
3. Rerun the control to ensure the problem was not a statistical outlier.
4. Ensure the control material was not contaminated by running another vial or level of
control.
5. Watch for normal sample flow as part of troubleshooting the instrument. If necessary,
call your Beckman Coulter Representative.

PN 624602A 3-9
QUALITY CONTROL
DELETING CONTROL DATA

3.8 Controls Window

This window enables you to see control information stored in the database.

Finding Control Results

Use the following to find the information and sort the information displayed on this window.

Use This To Do This

Select this graphic to expand the list of control categories. You can
double-click the folder beside this graphic to perform the same function.
Select this graphic to collapse the list of control categories. You can
double-click the folder beside this graphic to perform the same function.
Double-click one of the source folders to expand or collapse the list of
control types for the selected control source.
Double-click one of the folders representing a control type to expand or
collapse the list of lot numbers for the selected control source and type.
Select a lot number folder to see the details for the control runs of the
selected source, type and lot.

The control results grid displays the results.

Transmit, Print and Archive

Standard buttons appear at the top of this window. These buttons enable you to perform
actions on the items that appear in the control results grid. You can perform these actions on
multiple items at a time.

1. Select an item in the control results grid on the right side of the window. If you want to

perform the same action on all items, select .

2. Select the relative button to perform the action it represents. For example, select a lot

number and then select to print the control results.

3.9 DELETING CONTROL DATA

1. Select in the Quality Assurance application. The CONTROLS window appears.

2. Determine what you want to delete:
r If you want to delete specific control runs, select the control runs you want to delete
by selecting the row number that contains the control results. Selected rows appear
with a black background.
r If you want to delete all the control runs for a specific lot number, select the lot
number by selecting its file folder.

3-10 PN 624602A
 QUALITY CONTROL
ADJUSTING CONTROL LIMITS 3
r If you want to delete all the information associated with a lot number, including the
setup information, select the lot number by selecting its file folder.

3. Select to display the Control Data — DELETION REQUESTED window.

4. Verify the data you want to delete.

5. Select to delete the data. A message that asks you to confirm your request
appears.

6. Select to delete the data. The Workstation deletes the selected data. The data
cannot be retrieved.

3.10 ADJUSTING CONTROL LIMITS

1. Select on the Command Center to display the Quality Assurance application.

2. Select to display the Controls window.

3. Select the specific control for which you want to adjust limits. The control results table,
statistics and graphs appear on the window.

4. Select to replace the assigned values on this window with the

values that currently appear as the mean values. The Workstation also replaces the
expected ranges. The Workstation now displays the Lab Target and Lab Limit values.

3.11 PROVIDING COMMENTS FOR QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Select on the Command Center to display the Quality Assurance application.

2. Select the control file and run for comment addition.

3. Select . The Comments window appears.

4. Type the comments you want to provide.

5. Select to save the comments. For control runs, appears in the CMNT column
to indicate that it has a comment.

PN 624602A 3-11
QUALITY CONTROL
PROVIDING COMMENTS FOR QUALITY ASSURANCE

3.12 Participating in IQAP

Use this procedure to download control folder data from the LH 500 Series Workstation to a
formatted floppy diskette for submission to the Coulter Interlaboratory Quality Assurance
Program (IQAP). For your convenience you can use the data entry diskette that is included in
these LH 500 Series kits:

r COULTER® 5C® Series Cell Control

You will be supplied with self-adhesive return labels and pre-addressed mailers. Control data
should be submitted to IQAP on a monthly basis as soon as you have finished using a set of
controls.

IQAP Setup
An IQAP participant number is assigned to you at the time you enroll in the program. This
participant number identifies your data set from all others. Ensure that your IQAP
participant number has been entered in your Workstation prior to downloading your data to
diskette.

IQAP Download Procedure

At the LH 500 Series Workstation:

1. Select on the Command Center.

2. Select 0 to display the CONTROLS window.

3. Select . An IQAP Disk Storage window appears.

4. Insert a blank, formatted diskette into drive a: of the Workstation computer.
5. Select the lot numbers you want copied to the diskette.

6. Select . The following warning appears:

WARNING This function will erase all data contained in the floppy disk. Select OK to continue, Cancel to
abort.

7. Select to begin copying the control information to the diskette in the IQAP
format.

IMPORTANT Wait until the drive indicator light is off before pressing the eject button to remove the diskette
from the a: drive.

3-12 PN 624602A
 QUALITY CONTROL
XB ANALYSIS 3
8. After the download process is complete, remove the diskette from the a: drive and
immediately attach one of the pre-printed IQAP labels. Do not cover the sliding metal
door, the drive spindle, or the punched hole on the top right of the disk with the label.
9. Place the diskette in the pre-addressed mailer and send to IQAP.
10. If you wish to keep hard copies of the control folder results on record, print the contents
of the folders. Refer to the LH 500 Series Workstation Help as necessary.

Troubleshooting
If there is a problem downloading QC data to the diskette check the following:

r Make sure the diskette is inserted completely in the a: drive of the Workstation
computer.
r If you are using a blank diskette, make sure it has been formatted.
r If you are using a diskette from a LH 500 Series control or calibrator kit, try a different
diskette.
If all attempts to download are unsuccessful you can submit your control data to IQAP using
the Summary Data Entry Form or the COULTER Retic-C Control Data Entry Form. Refer to
the Data Entry chapter of the Interlaboratory Quality Assurance Program Procedure Manual
for specific instructions.

3.13 XB ANALYSIS
Overview
XB Analysis is a quality-control method that monitors instrument performance (calibration)
by tracking the MCV, MCH, and MCHC parameters of all patient samples. For more
information about XB Analysis, refer to the XB Analysis topic in the Reference Information
section of the Help.

Using XB
When using XB Analysis, it is important to process samples randomly; for example,
chemotherapy or neonate patient samples, if processed as a group, can cause XB to be OUT.

When XB Analysis is on, the Workstation compares the mean values with the target values
and the percent limits. If the mean values are within the percent limits of the target values,
then the XB is IN.

Setup Options
When you set up XB Analysis, you have options:

r You can specify that you want XB to automatically stop processing on an instrument.
Otherwise, XB status appears in the XB history log, and it is up to you to investigate it.
You should investigate any batch that is out of the XB limits.
r You can specify if you want to automatically print XB Analysis information.

PN 624602A 3-13
QUALITY CONTROL
XB ANALYSIS

Reviewing XB Analysis Information

The Workstation displays the batch means for each parameter in graph form. The lines on the
graph are from point to point, but when printed on the Graphic Printer, a horizontal bar
represents each mean.

The Workstation determines if results should be included in a batch by considering several

factors. The following factors cause results to be excluded from a batch:

6
r RBC value is less than 1.0 × 10
r Partial aspiration
r Non-numeric value for MCV, MCH, and MCHC
You can delete individual samples from the batch. The total number of deletes in a batch must
not exceed 5 out of a batch size of 20 for XB; otherwise, the batch means calculation becomes
invalid and is automatically removed from the Batch Means screen.

Reviewing XB Results

1. Select on the Command Center to display the Quality Assurance application.

2. Select to display the XB window.

3. Select:

This To Display This

Current XB batch results and statistics

XB batch results and statistics of the batch immediately prior to the

current batch.

XB batch results and statistics of the batch previous to the last batch.

XB batch means and statistics.

The window refreshes the results table, statistics and graphs based on the changes you made

3-14 PN 624602A
 4SAMPLE ANALYSIS 4
4.1 COLLECTING SPECIMENS
Collect whole blood in a salt of EDTA according to tube manufacturer's instructions and
procedures in:

r NCCLS publication H4-A3 (for capillary) 4

r NCCLS publication H3-A3 (for venipuncture) 5.
Beckman Coulter recommends you use a dipotassium or tripotassium salt of EDTA.

IMPORTANT Misleading results could occur if you fail to leave space at the top of the tube between the
sample and the stopper. Ensure you leave space at the top of the tube between the sample and the stopper
to facilitate mixing. Ensure, also, that the sample is properly mixed before analysis.

When preparing capillary specimens, follow the manufacturer's recommendations for the
microcollection device.

For Automatic aspiration mode, you need at least 1.0 mL of sample with proper proportion of
blood to anticoagulant.

For LH 500 Series systems, the instrument aspirates a maximum of 185 µL (0.185 mL) of
whole blood.

For Manual aspiration mode and Pre-dilute mode, the instrument aspirates approximately
125 µL (0.125 mL).

For Retic mode, 50 µL (0.50 mL) of whole blood is required for the preparation of the stained
sample. The instrument aspirates approximately 2 mL of a prepared diluted sample that was
originally made using 50µL (0.50 mL) of whole blood.

4.2 STORING SPECIMENS

Analyze specimens as soon as possible for optimum accuracy.

Note: For more information on handling and processing blood specimens, refer to NCCLS
publication H18-A. 6

Venipuncture Specimens
For CBC and DIFF:

r Run within 24 hours after collection if stored at room temperature (23.9°C or 75°F).
r Run within 48 hours after collection if stored at 2 to 8°C (35.6 to 46.4°F).
For Reticulocytes:

r Run within 24 hours after collection if stored at room temperature (23.9°C or 75°F).
r Run within 48 hours after collection if stored at 2 to 8°C (35.6 to 46.4°F).

Capillary Specimens
Follow the manufacturer's recommendations for the microcollection device.

PN 624602A 4-1
SAMPLE ANALYSIS
IDENTIFYING SAMPLES OVERVIEW

4.3 IDENTIFYING SAMPLES OVERVIEW

Automatic Aspiration Mode
The Workstation identifies a sample by:

r Reading the cassette number and cassette position of each sample at the time it is cycled
r Reading the tube’s bar-code label automatically
r Allowing you to provide sample demographic information that includes optional
identifiers, such as a patient identifier
r Time-stamping sample results with the date and time they were analyzed.

Manual Aspiration Mode

The Workstation identifies a sample by:

r Reading the tube’s bar-code label when you use the handheld scanner
r Allowing you to provide sample demographic information that includes optional
identifiers, such as a patient identifier
r Time-stamping sample results with the date and time they were analyzed.

Setting Up Identifiers
As part of system setup, you must specify whether your laboratory wants the cassette number
and position, the tube’s bar-code label, or both used as a positive identifier. When you specify
a positive identifier, the system links it irrevocably to the date and time of instrument
analysis.

If you specify cassette number and position, ensure you provide enough demographic
information or use another identifier, such as the sample identifier, to distinguish sample
results since you may use a cassette number and position more than once throughout the day.

4.4 UNIVERSAL TUBE PROCESSING

The LH 500 Series provides a universal cassette and 16mm cassette. They permit the
instrument to run multiple tube sizes and styles in automatic aspiration mode.

CAUTION Possible specimen leakage or clogging of the aspiration system can occur. Excessive piercing of
the sample tubes causes significant coring of the stopper. The number of pierces without problems can
vary slightly among sample tube types and manufacturers. Do not pierce a blood collection tube listed in
this document more than five times.

Your instrument contains a self-adjusting tube sensor. This tube sensor automatically adjusts
to various sizes of tubes in the same cassette. You do not need to manually change the
instrument tube sensor settings.

If your laboratory requires adapters or clips, contact your Beckman Coulter Representative.

4-2 PN 624602A
 SAMPLE ANALYSIS
UNIVERSAL TUBE PROCESSING 4
4.5 Using Bar-Code Labels
Beckman Coulter recommends the use of bar-code labels for specimen identification.

The LH 500 Series comes with

cassette and cassette position
numbers 01 to 99.

Two labels provide identification:

r Cassette bar-code label appears

as a bar-code and readable
number. The cassette bar-code
label includes the cassette ID
number and the 2-digit
position number.

Specimen tube bar-code labels provide sample identification. Bar-code label specifications are
in the Reference Information section of this help system.

If you use Interleaved 2-of-5 bar-code specimen labels, you must call your Beckman Coulter
Representative to set the number of digits on the label in the Analyzer.

PN 624602A 4-3
SAMPLE ANALYSIS
UNIVERSAL TUBE PROCESSING

Labeling Requirements

IMPORTANT Risk of misidentification. Use of poor quality, dirty, improperly placed or damaged bar-code
labels could keep the instrument from reading the bar-code labels. Ensure the bar-code labels are
undamaged. Ensure the bar-code labels conform to the specifications provided in the Bar-Code Label
Specifications topic.

You can use up to two labels in addition

to the sample tube manufacturer's label.

Do not skew the bar-code label more than

12 degrees.

Place each label so that it does not cover

the bottom of the tube and is flat and
smooth against the tube. This prevents
the adapter from being broken or the tube
jammed, and ensures the label can be
scanned properly.

Ensure that the bar-code symbol and a

1/4-inch blank space on either side of the
bar-code symbol are visible to the
scanner.
For tubes with rubber-stopper caps or foil tops:

1. Place the bar-code label so that the

first bar of the bar-code symbol is at
least 1/2 inch from the tube cap.
2. Press the label down securely,
including edges and corners.
3. Ensure the bars on the label are
parallel to the stopper.

For all other tubes:

Place the bar-code label so that the first bar of the bar-code symbol is at least 1/4 inch from
the tube cap.

4-4 PN 624602A
 SAMPLE ANALYSIS
UNIVERSAL TUBE PROCESSING 4
4.6 Cassette Handling

The cassette is the carrier for the

sample tubes (patient, control, or
special test) used in Automatic
aspiration mode where automatic
loading, mixing, and sampling
occurs.

Tubes should be pushed into the

cassette with the tube bar-code
labels facing up.

Always hold the cassette firmly by

its edges. Do not try to hold or lift a
cassette by grabbing a tube. The
weight of the remaining tubes could
cause the cassette to fall.

Cleaning the Cassette

Wash the cassettes as needed in warm soapy water and rinse thoroughly. Do not use an
abrasive. Keep the cassettes free of dried blood, bleach, or diluent. Be careful not to scratch or
deface the bar-code labels. Dirt, smears, pencil lead, and grease can affect bar-code label
reading.

Loading the Cassette

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Forcing a tube into the cassette improperly could cause it to break. Do
not force a tube into a cassette. If a tube should break, use your laboratory’s safety procedure for cleaning
the broken glass.

IMPORTANT Sample misidentification could occur. If not using the appropriate bar-code labels on the
sample tubes, ensure you place the tubes in the proper cassette positions.

1. Slide each sample firmly into the cassette.

2. Ensure the bar-codes are facing up.

PN 624602A 4-5
SAMPLE ANALYSIS
UNIVERSAL TUBE PROCESSING

4.7 Cycling Samples in Automatic Aspiration Mode

IMPORTANT Poor quality specimens may require inspection and special attention. Specimens that may
contain fibrin, cell fragments or other debris, or have been difficult to collect, such as, pediatric or oncology
specimens may require special handling. The LH 500 is an automated cell counter that uses triplicate
counting with strict voting criteria, and has proprietary flagging algorithms to confirm parameter results
prior to reporting. Rarely, a transient or partial aperture blockage may not be detected by any of these
processes. A partial aperture blockage may cause erroneous results, such as, WBC count lower than what
is actually present.

As with any analysis method in which a specimen of suspect quality is used, particular
attention should be given to the results. Verify the accuracy of results that are flagged and
review all results that exceed your laboratory's action limits.

IMPORTANT Changing the reporting units after initial setup may cause misleading results. Make sure the
reporting units currently selected for patient results are correct by checking any result in the database.

IMPORTANT A printer malfunction could cause you to report erroneous results. Check all printers attached
to your LH 500. Make sure they are working properly and all numbers are printing correctly.

IMPORTANT Operating the LH 500 Series with open doors or panels introduces electrical interference
which can cause misleading results. Operate the LH 500 Series with all doors and panels closed.

IMPORTANT Running out of reagent will cause erroneous results. The reagent sensors are designed to
alert you before you run out. If you disable reagent sensors, the message Reagent Sensors Off appears on
the screen and on graphic printouts. Carefully monitor the reagent’s level if you ever disable its sensor.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. If a problem occurs while the system is cycling, press the emergency
stop button and wait for the system to stop before you do anything to correct the problem. Attempting to
correct an instrument problem while the instrument continues to process samples could injure you.

IMPORTANT Misleading results can occur if specimens contain clots. Inspect specimens for clots and use
good laboratory practices for verifying results to ensure you do not receive misleading results.

1. Ensure your specimens have been collected, stored, and mixed properly.
2. On the Command Center, select AUTO ANALYSIS as the process type; C or CD as the
run type; and AUTO as the aspiration mode.
3. Load the cassettes.
4. Place the cassettes firmly and securely into the loading bay on the right side of the
Diluter.
Note: If AUTO MODE message appears in the instrument Status Box, the cassette will

automatically start. If the SELECT FUNCTION message appears, press to being

processing.
5. After the instrument cycles the samples, review the sample results on the Workstation.

4-6 PN 624602A
 SAMPLE ANALYSIS
CYCLING SAMPLES IN MANUAL ASPIRATION MODE 4
6. The instrument will remain in automatic mode until is pressed.

4.8 CYCLING SAMPLES IN MANUAL ASPIRATION MODE

IMPORTANT Poor quality specimens may require inspection and special attention. Specimens that may
contain fibrin, cell fragments or other debris, or have been difficult to collect, such as, pediatric or oncology
specimens may require special handling. The LH 500 is an automated cell counter that uses triplicate
counting with strict voting criteria, and has proprietary flagging algorithms to confirm parameter results
prior to reporting. Rarely, a transient or partial aperture blockage may not be detected by any of these
processes. A partial aperture blockage may cause erroneous results, such as, WBC count lower than what
is actually present.

As with any analysis method in which a specimen of suspect quality is used, particular
attention should be given to the results. Verify the accuracy of results that are flagged and
review all results that exceed your laboratory's action limits.

IMPORTANT Blood detectors are inactive in Manual mode. Sample and aspiration integrity are not checked.
To avoid misleading results, ensure complete immersion of the aspirator tip in the sample. Do not remove
the sample until you hear the beep.

IMPORTANT Misleading results can occur if specimens contain clots. Inspect specimens for clots and use
good laboratory practices for verifying results to ensure you do not receive misleading results.

1. Ensure your specimens have been collected,stored, and mixed properly.

2. On the Command Center, select AUTO ANALYSIS as the process type; C or CD as the
run type; and MANUAL as the aspiration mode.

3. Enter Sample Identifier into the bar-code field; and then press or . If

the bar-code field is not active, press

4. Remove the stopper from the specimen tube.
5. Immerse the aspirator tip in the tube and press the sample bar. The instrument will
aspirate the sample.
6. When you hear a beep, remove the tube from the aspirator tip. The probe cleaner retracts
the aspirator and automatically cleans the aspirator tip.
7. After the instrument cycles the samples, review the sample results on the Workstation.

8. The instrument will remain in manual mode until is pressed.

4.9 CYCLING SAMPLES IN PRE-DILUTE MODE

Only CBC results are reported on a Pre-dilute mode sample.

PN 624602A 4-7
SAMPLE ANALYSIS
CYCLING SAMPLES IN PRE-DILUTE MODE

IMPORTANT Poor quality specimens may require inspection and special attention. Specimens that may
contain fibrin, cell fragments or other debris, or have been difficult to collect, such as, pediatric or oncology
specimens may require special handling.

The LH 500 Series is an automated cell counter that uses triplicate counting with strict voting
criteria, and has proprietary flagging algorithms to confirm parameter results prior to
reporting. Rarely, a transient or partial aperture blockage may not be detected by any of these
processes. A partial aperture blockage may cause erroneous results, such as, WBC count
lower than what is actually present.

As with any analysis method in which a specimen of suspect quality is used, particular
attention should be given to the results. Verify the accuracy of results that are flagged and
review all results that exceed your laboratory’s action limits.

1. Prepare the dilution of blood and diluent appropriate to purpose of dilution with a
minimum of 150 µL total volume. Note: Use larger volumes of diluent and blood, if
available, to minimize the possibility of short sampling the dilution.
2. On the Command Center, select AUTO ANALYSIS as the process type.
3. Check the Pre-dilute checkbox and enter the factor.
Note: The instrument will automatically run the sample as a CBC in manual mode.
Command Center settings used prior to running a pre-dilute do not change.

4. Press .

5. Enter the sample ID in the bar-code field. Press .

6. Mix the sample gently but thoroughly.

7. Present the sample to the manual aspiration tip and immerse the tip into the sample.
Press sample bar.

IMPORTANT Incomplete aspiration will cause erroneous results. Tilt the tube as shown to ensure full
aspiration.

8. Remove the sample when you hear the beep and the System Status box displays
DILUTING.

4-8 PN 624602A
 SAMPLE ANALYSIS
CHANGING RUN TYPE 4
Sample count results are automatically multiplied by the dilution factor for the final
results. The dilution factor used is displayed and printed next to mode as Cxdilution
facto Manual, eg Cx2.0 M. "Predilute" is also printed in the footer of the printout.

4.10 CHANGING RUN TYPE

1. Go to the Command Center.

2. Use to select the default run type for sample processing.

CBC/DIFF Run samples for CBC and Diff.

CBC ONLY Run samples for CBC only.
RETIC ONLY Run samples for Retic only.
LATEX Run samples for Latron.
Ltx Prime Run samples for Latron primer.

The CURRENT MODE message displays the run type you select.

4.11 ENABLING/DISABLING BLOOD DETECTOR

1. Blood detectors will automatically become enabled after one aspiration.

2. To disable the Blood Detector, uncheck the box next to the blood detector on the
Command Center.
Note: The system flags all parameters with a P (partial aspiration) when samples are
analyzed with blood detectors disabled. P flagged control run results are automatically
removed from statistical calculations; there is no method to reintroduce the flagged runs
into calculations.

PN 624602A 4-9
SAMPLE ANALYSIS
ENABLING/DISABLING BLOOD DETECTOR

4-10 PN 624602A
 5DATA REVIEW 5
5.1 REVIEWING SAMPLE RESULTS

1. Select on the Command Center to display the Patient Tests application.

2. If necessary, select to display the Results & Graphics window that contains:
r Parameters
r Flags and codes
r Suspect/definitive messages
r Histograms
r DataPlots
r Identification information.
3. If necessary, find the sample results you want to review.
4. Specify the way you want the window updated:

Keeps the current sample displayed. You can view the graphs,
demographics and detailed parameter results (including research
data) for the sample results as needed.

The Workstation continues to receive, process and store analysis

data from the Analyzer.
Automatically updates the window as the Workstation receives
patient sample analysis data from the Analyzer.

5.2 REVIEWING RESEARCH DATA

Select on the Results & Graphics window to display the Research Data window that
contains:

r Optional identification information.

r Additional parameters
r Flags and codes
r Suspect/definitive messages
r Histograms.

5.3 REVIEWING HISTOGRAMS

Histograms show relative cell frequency versus size. They provide information about
erythrocyte, leukocyte, and thrombocyte frequency. They also might show the presence of
subpopulations. Histograms provide a means of comparing the sizes of a patient’s cells with
normal populations.

PN 624602A 5-1
DATA REVIEW
EDITING SAMPLE RESULTS

Double-click a histogram to see an enlarged version of it. Select to return to the normal
size.

What to Look For

IMPORTANT Incorrect results can occur if you estimate the number of cells from the distribution curves.
Curves show only the relative, not actual, number of cells in each size range. Do not estimate the number of
cells from the distribution curves.

When reviewing histograms, inspect:

r Position of individual populations as compared to normal/typical positions

r Amount of separation between populations as compared to normal/typical separation
r Relative concentration of each population as compared to normal/typical concentrations
r Presence of unexpected or non-typical populations.
Refer to the Reference manual for more information about histograms. Refer to your
laboratory’s operating procedures for details about interpreting histograms.

5.4 EDITING SAMPLE RESULTS

1. Select on the Command Center to display the Patient Tests application.

2. Find the results you want to edit.

3. Select to display the Edit Sample window.

4. Edit the following as necessary:
r Preassigned and read identification information
r Parameter results
r Demographic information

r Use to move between fields.

NOTE: Duplicate Sample IDs or Cass/Pos are allowed for the same Patient ID only if the
Test Type is different. If the same test type is specified for a Sample ID, the following
message will display:
Duplicate Sample ID entry. Sample IDs must be unique within the ToDo list. Original
value will be restored.
Blank Patient IDs are considered to be the same Patient ID.
5. If you want to add a test or remove a PENDING test:
a. Select the specific test identifiers you want to add or remove.
b. Provide the sample identification information for the tests.

5-2 PN 624602A
 DATA REVIEW
REVIEWING PATIENT HISTORY 5
IMPORTANT Incorrect results or incorrect identification could lead to misleading results or
misidentification. Before saving edits, check that you typed them properly.

6. Select to save the edits in the database. The Workstation recalculates any derived
parameters and reapplies flagging limits. Decision criteria rules are not reapplied.
Reports with Pending status include a special message indicating the status. When all
tests complete processing, the report includes a special message that indicates the change
in status.

5.5 REVIEWING PATIENT HISTORY

1. Select on the Command Center to display the Patient Tests application.

2. Find the most recent sample for the patient you want to review.

3. Select to display the Patient History window that contains:

r Patient History Table
r Patient History Statistics
r Patient History Graphs

5.6 PROCESSING RESULTS OVERVIEW

The Coulter LH 500 Series provides many functions to help you identify and process results
quickly and effectively. The Workstation includes flags and codes with results to help you.
You can also customize the flagging of results and define rules for flagging sample results.

Flagging
The Workstation assigns priorities to flags. Critical flags (cH/cL) are the most important.
They are followed by action flags (aH/aL) and then default flags(H/L).

IMPORTANT Flagging is evaluated when the sample is analyzed. Flagging is reevaluated for a sample when
the results are manually edited, or when new results are received for a pending sample. Flagging is not
reevaluated upon a change of flagging limits for results already in the database. Delta Check and Reflex
Decision Rules are not reevaluated.
Beckman Coulter Inc. does not claim to identify every abnormality in all samples. Beckman Coulter
suggests using all available flagging options to optimize the sensitivity of instrument results. All flagging
options include reference ranges (H/L), action and critical limits, definitive flags, suspect flags, parameter
codes, delta checks, decision rules and system alarms. Beckman Coulter recommends avoiding the use of
single messages or outputs to summarize specimen results or patient conditions.

You can customize many of the flags to suit the needs of your laboratory. You can define:

r Default high/low limits

r Different high/low limits based on gender and age
r Different high/low limits based on location

PN 624602A 5-3
DATA REVIEW
PROCESSING RESULTS OVERVIEW

r Action limits that exceed the default limits. These appear with a unique aH (action high)
and aL (action low) flags
r Critical limits that exceed the action limits. These appear with a unique cH (critical
high) and cL (critical low) flags
r Limits (action) that force the display of definitive messages
r Limits that route results to a special Review Folder (Auto Validation).
Of course, you do not need to define these all at once, you can use the default set and
gradually add additional limits based on your laboratory's assessment.

Rules for Flagging Results (Decision Rules & Criteria)

You can define rules for delta checking. When the Workstation finds a sample for a patient
that already has sample results in the DataBase, it uses the rules you define to determine how
to flag the sample.

You can also define rules (Reflex Manager) to identify sample results that meet a set of
criteria. For example, you can automatically generate the message "Perform Retic Count" in
the comment field if the Workstation receives a sample result with Hgb <= 10.5 or RBC <= 3.2
and MCV <= 65.

As part of your rule definition, you can specify where you want the results that satisfy the rule
to appear. For example, the Workstation can route results to special Reflex Manager, Delta
Check and Review folders.

5-4 PN 624602A
 DATA REVIEW
FLAGS AND CODES 5
Processing Flagging Limits
The following flow chart illustrates how the system processes flagging limits.

5.7 FLAGS AND CODES

As appropriate, the LH 500 Series applies instrument-generated and/or laboratory-defined
flags, codes, and/or messages to each set of patient results. Flags, codes, and suspect or
definitive messages are used to alert you to an instrument malfunction, specimen
abnormality, abnormal data pattern, or abnormal results. Beckman Coulter recommends
review, appropriate to the requirements of the patient population, of all results displaying a
flag, code or message.

PN 624602A 5-5
DATA REVIEW
FLAGS AND CODES

IMPORTANT The operating temperature influences the rate of kinetic reactions. The LH 500 Series should
be recalibrated whenever the ambient temperature changes by 10 degrees Fahrenheit.

Establishing Flagging Levels

There may be situations where the presence of a rare event cell may fail to trigger a suspect
message. System sensitivity increases when appropriately set suspect messages are used in
combination with laboratory-defined definitive messages, action value flags, and critical value
flags. In addition, complete review of the peripheral smear, regardless of the nature of the flag,
code, or message, will minimize false negatives.

In order to optimize both instrument-generated and laboratory-defined flagging for efficiency

and clinical significance, Beckman Coulter recommends completion of LH 500 Series-specific
sensitivity and specificity studies.

IMPORTANT Flagging is evaluated when the sample is analyzed. Flagging is reevaluated for a sample when
the results are manually edited, or when new results are received for a pending sample. Flagging is not
reevaluated upon a change of flagging limits for results already in the database.
Beckman Coulter suggests using all available flagging options to optimize the sensitivity of instrument
results. All flagging options include reference ranges (H/L), action and critical limits, definitive messages,
suspect messages, parameter codes, delta checks, decision rules and system alarms. Beckman Coulter
recommends avoiding the use of single messages or outputs to summarize specimen results or patient
conditions.

Indicates reference interval low or high.

Indicates an action, critical or other flag.

Flags appear to the right of the result. Codes appear in place of results when the system
cannot obtain results. When looking at codes and flags, look for patterns. For example, see if
all results show the same or related codes. If they do not, look at all the RBC parameters, then
the WBC parameters. For specific parameters, the flagging occurs as a result of the flagging
on other parameters.

Flags

* Result exceeds instrument's counting threshold. Follow your laboratory's policies

for reviewing the sample. This flag is applicable to MCV only.

IMPORTANT Incorrect results can occur. If the WBC, RBC, HGB, or PLT have + when cycling in Manual
mode, run a blank cycle before analyzing the next test sample to prevent carryover to the next sample.
When cycling in Automatic mode, rerun the sample immediately following the one with the +. Sample
dilutions may also result in wrong differential results. The instrument will automatically set to C run type
when predilute is chosen.

5-6 PN 624602A
 DATA REVIEW
FLAGS AND CODES 5
+ Result exceeds linearity (reportable) range. Follow your laboratory's policies for
reviewing the sample.
aL Result is lower than your action low limits. Follow your laboratory’s policies for
reviewing the sample.
aH Result is higher than your action high limits. Follow your laboratory’s policies for
reviewing the sample.
cL Result is lower than your critical low limits. It is a critical value and requires
immediate attention. Follow your laboratory’s policies for reviewing the sample.
cH Result is higher than your critical high limits. It is a critical value and requires
immediate attention. Follow your laboratory’s policies for reviewing the sample.
D Result triggered a Delta Check rule as defined by your laboratory.
e Result has been calculated from a manually edited parameter. This flag overwrites
+, *, v, V and R flags.
E Result has been edited. This flag overwrites +, *, v, V and R flags.
H Result is higher than your reference interval high limit. Follow your laboratory’s
policies for reviewing the sample.
L Result is lower than your reference interval low limit. Follow your laboratory’s
policies for reviewing the sample.
P The instrument detected a partial aspiration during sample analysis or the blood
detectors are disabled.
R Review the result according to your laboratory's protocol. When editing parameter
results, this flag requires special handling. Any parameter derived from an
R-flagged parameter cannot be recalculated until the parameters with the R flags
have been edited. R flags may also indicate a system alarm has occured.
V Result corresponds to a single count-period voteout.
v Result is a parameter calculated from one with a single count-period voteout. This
flag overwrites +, *, and R flags.

You may want to look at the messages that appear on the Research Data window. The
Research Data window provides more detailed research data.

Codes

..... Incomplete computation. This could occur on calculated parameters because of a

voteout (- - - - -) or overrange results (+++++) for the parameters used in the
calculation. Check other parameters, such as WBC, to ensure sufficient data was
received for calculations.

PN 624602A 5-7
DATA REVIEW
SUSPECT AND DEFINITIVE MESSAGES

----- When this code appears for CBC parameter results and no average histogram
appears for the affected parameter, it indicates a total voteout.

If this code appears for WBC, the WBC subpopulation absolute number results
appear as ..... since they are calculated from the white count and the WBC result
was non-numeric.
+++++ This result exceeds the instrument's operating range. Follow your laboratory’s
policies for reviewing the sample.

IMPORTANT Incorrect results can occur. If the WBC, RBC, HGB, or PLT have +++++ when cycling in
Manual mode, run a blank cycle before analyzing the next test sample to prevent carryover to the next
sample. When cycling in Automatic mode, rerun the sample immediately following the one with the +++++.
Sample dilutions may also result in wrong differential results. The instrument will automatically set to C run
type when predilute is chosen.

::::: The instrument detected a clog in the flow cell. PC1, PC2 or FC will be displayed
on the y-axis of the dataplot

5.8 SUSPECT AND DEFINITIVE MESSAGES

As appropriate, the LH 500 Series applies instrument-generated and/or laboratory-defined
flags, codes, and/or messages to each set of patient results. Flags, codes, and suspect or
definitive messages are used to alert you to an instrument malfunction, specimen
abnormality, abnormal data pattern, or abnormal results. Beckman Coulter recommends
review, appropriate to the requirements of the patient population, of all results displaying a
flag, code or message.

Establishing Flagging Levels

There may be situations where the presence of a rare event cell may fail to trigger a suspect
message. System sensitivity increases when appropriately set suspect message are used in
combination with laboratory-defined definitive messages, action value flags, and critical value
flags. In addition, complete review of the peripheral smear, regardless of the nature of the flag,
code, or message, will minimize false negatives.

In order to optimize both instrument-generated and laboratory-defined flagging for efficiency

and clinical significance, Beckman Coulter recommends completion of LH 500 Series-specific
sensitivity and specificity studies.

IMPORTANT Beckman Coulter Inc. does not claim to identify every abnormality in all samples. Beckman
Coulter Inc. suggests using all available flagging options to optimize the sensitivity of instrument results.
All flagging options include reference ranges (H/L), action and critical limits, definitive flags, suspect flags,
parameter codes, delta checks, decision rules and system alarms. Beckman Coulter Inc. recommends
avoiding the use of single messages or outputs to summarize specimen results or patient conditions.

Suspect Messages
Suspect messages appear for sample results based on an abnormal cell distribution or
population. The system generates these messages according to an internal algorithm.

5-8 PN 624602A
 DATA REVIEW
SUSPECT AND DEFINITIVE MESSAGES 5
All sample results with suspect messages automatically appear in the Review Folder. Review
the sample according to your laboratory's procedures. If you observe a higher rate of suspect
flags than usual call your Beckman Coulter Representative.

Message Notes Source

Aging Sample Pattern started shifting because of aging Diff
neutrophils and eosinophils. This message appears
on the Research Data window only.
Cellular Interference WBC histogram pattern consistent with CBC
interference at the 35 fL region.
Dimorphic Reds Two populations of RBCs. CBC
Giant Platelets When Giant Platelets are detected, Plt, MPV, PCT, CBC
and PDW will display with an R flag.
Imm. NE1 Immature neutrophil 1 (immature neutrophils Diff
and/or bands).
Imm. NE 2 Immature neutrophil 2 (metamyelocytes, Diff
myelocytes, promyelocytes).
Low Event # Less than 800 WBC events were counted for the
differential. R appears next to DIFF%, and DIFF#
when this message appears.
LY Blast Suspect blasts in the lymphocyte area of the Diff
dataplot.
MO Blast Suspect blasts in the monocyte area of the dataplot. Diff
NE Blast Suspect blasts in the neutrophil area of the Diff
dataplot.
NRBC Nucleated RBCs. Diff
Platelet Clumps Platelet histogram, WBC histogram, and RBC CBC
histogram patterns consistent with platelet clumps,
fragmented red cells, or small red cells. When
platelet clumps are detected, Plt, MPV, PCT, and
PDW will display with an R flag.
RBC Interference The MCV is less than 50 fL. The RBC, Hct, MCH, CBC
MCHC, RDW, Plt, Pct, MPV, PDW, and RET# will
display with an R flag.
Red Cell Agglutination The MCV is greater then 110 fL and the MCHC is CBC
greater than 40.0 g/dL.
Variant LY Variant lymphocytes. Diff

PN 624602A 5-9
DATA REVIEW
SUSPECT AND DEFINITIVE MESSAGES

Verify Diff This flag can be generated by an internal algorithm Diff

or a software rule. R appears next to DIFF%, and
DIFF# when this message appears. The message is
generated by the software rule if WBC > 1.5 x 103
cells/µL and MO% ³ 20. Verify differential results
according to your laboratory’s protocol.
Verify Retic The RET%, RET#, IRF, and MRV will displayed Retic
with an R flag. Verify retic results according to
your laboratory’s protocol.
WBC Exceeds The uncorrected WBC is greater than 200.0 x 103. CBC
Linearity A plus sign (+) appears next to the WBC count and
an R appears next to RBC, Hgb, Hct, MCV, MCH,
MCHC, Diff%, and Diff#.

Definitive Messages
Definitive messages appear for sample results based on action limits exceeded for age only.
The messages are set up as part of your flagging limits.

Message Result Exceeds Notes

Anemia Low limit for RBC or Hgb Pancytopenia overrides this
message.
Anisocytosis High limit for RDW
(with gradient
ranges)
Basophilia High limit for BA% or BA#
Eosinophilia High limit for EO% or
EO#
Erythrocytosis High limit for RBC
H&H Check Failed Hct < ((Hgb*3) - 3)
OR
Hct > ((Hgb * 3)+3)
Hypochromia (with Low limit for MCH
gradient ranges)
Large Platelets High limit for MPV
Leukopenia Low limit for WBC Pancytopenia can override this
message, if it is enabled.
Leukocytosis High limit for WBC
Lymphopenia Low limit for LY% or LY#
Lymphocytosis High limit for LY% or LY#

5-10 PN 624602A
 DATA REVIEW
AUTO VALIDATION OVERVIEW 5
Macrocytosis (with High limit for MCV
gradient ranges)
Microcytosis (with Low limit for MCV
gradient ranges)
Monocytosis High limit for MO% or
MO#
Neutropenia Low limit for NE% or NE#
Neutrophilia High limit for NE% or
NE#
Pancytopenia Low limit for WBC, RBC This message can override messages
and Plt for Anemia, Leukopenia and
Thrombocytopenia, if it is enabled.
The system generates this message
automatically.
Reticulocytosis High limit for RET% or
RET#
Small Platelets Low limit for MPV
Thrombocytopenia Low limit for Plt Pancytopenia overrides this
message.
Thrombocytosis High limit for Plt

5.9 AUTO VALIDATION OVERVIEW

The enhanced Auto Validation procedure provides information as to the state of the sample.
The sample can have one of three states with respect to validation:

r Auto Validated, meaning that it has passed all criteria for validation
r Validated, meaning that although it failed at least one criteria, the sample has been
manually validated
r Not Validated, meaning that the sample failed at least one criteria and has not been
manually validated.
On the screen, samples which are Auto Validated will not appear in the Reflex, Delta, or
Review folders, and will not have the Validate button enabled. If the sample fails validation
for non-decision rule criteria, it would appear in the Review Folder. If the sample fails for
Decision Rule criteria, it could appear in either the Delta Check or Reflex folders (depending
which one was triggered), or in the Review folder, depending whether they have configured
Delta Check and Reflex failures to go to the Review folder. It is possible, if the sample fails
both decision rule-related and non-rule related criteria, for the sample to appear in both or all
three folders. If the user reviews and manually validates the sample, it would no longer
appear in any of these folders, and the validate button would be in a depressed state when
that single sample is selected.

PN 624602A 5-11
DATA REVIEW
AUTO VALIDATION OVERVIEW

For the print and host transmission, these messages are output as "Sample Auto Validated",
"Sample Not Validated", or "Sample Validated". In addition, individual codes will provide
validation information for predefined parameter sets, referred to as parameter blocks. If at
least one parameter from the parameter block is included in the reported results, the
appropriate validation code will be displayed. The codes may be disabled for host
transmission in the Host Communications Setup area.

The major difference between the screen and print is that the screen is not profile specific.
This means that on screen, all parameters, suspect/definitive messages, and rules triggered
will be displayed, and the validation status depends on the whole sample. For the print and
host transmission, only those parameters, suspect/definitive messages, and rule messages
which are part of the profile are output, and the validation codes and messages are based on
this output.

The logic for arriving at the validation status is as follows:

We first reduce the parameters to an active set. The set of active parameters starts with the set
of parameters which is enabled for the system in parameter setup. It is further reduced to
those parameters which were either run on the analyzer or edited into the sample. For
printing and transmission, the active set is further reduced to the parameters included in the
selected profile. If the status we are looking for is a validation code, the active set is further
reduced to the parameters applicable to that code.

For example, suppose that all parameters are enabled for the system except research. Now
suppose that a CD sample is run. We are now only looking at CD parameters, except the
research ones. Now if we are looking at the printout and the selected profile is CBC, we are
reduced to only the CBC parameters. To determine the status of the Validiation Message we
are looking for all the CBC parameters. To determine the status of the parameter codes, such
as the C Code (CBC parameter block), then we're still looking at all CBC parameters. If it is H
Code, we're looking at only Hgb and Hct parameters. The W code only looks at the WBC,
Hgb and Plt parameters If we're looking for the D code (Diff parameter block) or R code
(Reticulocyte block), we have no parameters, and the code would not be displayed.

Now that we know which parameters to include, we will look for anything which causes an
Auto Validation failure:

r Any active parameter which exceeds limits, where the limit has been configured as
autoverification criteria. This could also be based on a definitive message, where the
definitive set has been specified as autoverification criteria.
r H & H Check Failed is a separate check. Since it is not tied to any limit set, it can not be
configured as autoverification criteria. It will always trigger a failure when both HGB and
HCT are part of the active set.
r Any active parameter which has a nonnumeric value (+++++, :::::, ....., -----), a Review
flag, Partial Aspiration (P), exceeds linearity (+), or MCV exceeds threshold (*).
r Any suspect (non-research) flag, where the active parameter set includes at least one
parameter from the suspect message parameter group. Suspect messages are associated
with either CBC, Diff, or Retic parameters. If, for example, a CBC suspect message is
triggered and at least one CBC parameter is in the active set, we have an autovalidation
failure.

5-12 PN 624602A
 DATA REVIEW
AUTO VALIDATION OVERVIEW 5
r Any reflex or delta rule, where ALL parameters included in the rule must be in the active
set.

IMPORTANT Several precautions have been taken to ensure integrity of Manual Validation. If new data is
collated to a sample, if the sample is edited in a way that would cause a reflag, or if the profile is changed,
manual validation for the sample is cleared.

Auto Validation Example

Auto Validation Setup

r Enable Validation Codes
r Enable Auto Validation Criteria for Action Limits
r Enable Decision rules = Reflex rule is defined as "If Retic % < 0.2 then Make Retic Smear
and scan slide.”

Sample Setup:
r Run Type = CBC/Diff
r Patient Sample preassigned with a CBC and Retic Report Profile

Sample Results: (printed and transmitted)

Comments: Make Retic Smear and scan slide

WBC 4.8 103/L RBC 2.53 106/L Plt 80 aL 103/L
Hgb 6.3 g/dL MPV 10.3 fL
Hct 19.6 %
MCV 77.4 fL
MCH 24.9 pg
MCHC 32.1 g/dL
RDW 16.1 %

Ret % %
Ret # /pL

End of Completed Report, Sample Not Validated, C NV, H AV, W NV

PN 624602A 5-13
DATA REVIEW
AUTO VALIDATION OVERVIEW

Manual Validation:
Once the results are reviewed and manually validated at the workstation the report
appears as follows.

Comments:
WBC 4.8 103/L RBC 2.53 106/L Plt 80 aL 103/L
Hgb 6.3 g/dL MPV 10.3 fL
Hct 19.6 %
MCV 77.4 fL
MCH 24.9 pg
MCHC 32.1 g/dL
RDW 16.1 %

Ret % %
Ret # /pL

End of Completed Report, Sample Validated, C V, H AV, W V

Sample Setup:
Run the sample in the Retic mode, sample results are as follows.

Comments: Make Retic Smear and scan slide

WBC 4.8 103/L RBC 2.53 106/L Plt 80 aL 103/L
Hgb 6.3 g/dL MPV 10.3 fL
Hct 19.6 %
MCV 77.4 fL
MCH 24.9 pg
MCHC 32.1 g/dL
RDW 16.1 %

Ret % 0.14 %
Ret # .0035 /pL

End of Completed Report, Sample Not Validated, C NV, H AV, W NV, R NV

5-14 PN 624602A
 6SHUTDOWN 6
6.1 POWER ON/OFF OVERVIEW
The LH 500 Series Analyzer, Workstation Computer, Instrument Computer and Monitor are
connected to an Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS). In the event of a power outage at your
facility, the components will continue to operate for a short time so you can shut down the
system. If your system has a printer, it should be connected directly to the facility power.

For troubleshooting purposes, you may be directed to power down selected pieces of the
system. The following sections provide information on the pieces of the system that you can
power on/off.

Analyzer
Every 24 Hours: Beckman Coulter recommends that you shut down the instrument for at
least 30 minutes every 24 hours. If you leave your instrument powered on in Shutdown and
the pneumatics are off, an automatic purge occurs every 24 hours to prevent flow cell and
sample line clogging.

Over 48 hours: Prolonged Shutdown. Perform a Shutdown for 30 minutes. Then perform a
Startup and turn the power off.

Over 7 Days: Extended Shutdown. All reagents are replaced with Distilled water. Turn the
power to the instrument off.

Over 45 Days: Long-Term Shutdown. Call your Beckman Coulter Representative who will
decide appropriate actions that will need to be taken. This could include complete removal of
reagents and release of the pinch valves.

Instrument Computer
See topic Optimizing the Instrument Computer Hard Disk.

Workstation Computer
You should only power down the Workstation after shutting it down. Powering down the
Workstation also powers down the monitor. See topic Shutting Down the Workstation.

Monitor
You can turn the Monitor off while the instrument cycles samples; however, a screen saver is
available to extend the life of the monitor. It is unnecessary to power off the monitor on a
regular basis.

6.2 PERFORMING DAILY SHUTDOWN

The SHUTDOWN process removes the reagents from the LH 500 Series Analyzer and
replaces it with cleaner. At the end of the cycle, the compressor automatically shuts off..
Beckman Coulter, Inc. recommends a daily Shutdown for a minimum of 30 minutes.

1. On the Command Center, select SHUTDOWN as the process type.

2. Press . The instrument status box displays Sys Not Ready.

PN 624602A 6-1
SHUTDOWN
PERFORMING EXTENDED SHUTDOWN

3. After 30 minutes, select STARTUP as the process type. Press .

Note: The only process type allowed after SHUTDOWN is STARTUP.

WARNING To prevent injury, turn the power OFF when performing any manual cleaning, replacement or
adjustment procedure if the instrument has been in Shut Down more than 22 hours. The Autopurge cycle
turns on the pneumatics power supply and performs a special Diluter cycle automatically 23 hours after a
Shut Down cycle has been initiated. This cycle repeats every 24 hours after that.

6.3 PERFORMING EXTENDED SHUTDOWN

Note: This procedure requires that the Instrument interface is displayed.

Beckman Coulter, Inc. recommends that you perform an extended Shutdown if the
instrument will be idle for more than 7 days. If you turn off the power at night and the
instrument is going to be idle for more than 48 hours, perform the Prolonged Shutdown
procedure.

1. Perform the Daily Shutdown procedure.

2. Perform the Daily Startup procedure.
3. Replace all reagents with distilled water.
4. Select Diluter Functions Prime Reagents ALL.
5. On the Command Center, select SHUTDOWN as the process type.
6. Once the cycle is complete, turn OFF the instrument using the On/Off switch on the
back of the main unit.
7. Shutdown the Workstation.
To restart the system after an extended shutdown, perform the following:

1. Replace the distilled water with the appropriate reagents.

2. Power on the Workstation.
3. Power on the instrument using the ON/OFF switch at the back of the instrument. Ensure
the instrument status window displays SELECT FUNCTION.
4. Select Diluter Functions >> Prime Reagents >> ALL.
5. Perform the Daily Startup procedure.
6. On the Command Center, select LATRON as the process type. Cycle controls.
7. Perform and verify Daily Checks Test Results according to your laboratory's protocol.

6.4 SHUTTING DOWN THE WORKSTATION

1. Select . The Log Off The System window appears.

2. Select Shutdown the Workstation.

6-2 PN 624602A
 SHUTDOWN
RESETTING THE WORKSTATION 6

3. Select . The Workstation logs you off, saves all active data and closes all
applications. It can no longer receive information from your information system or the
Analyzer.

Several messages appear, such as the Shutdown in Progress window. When the
Workstation finishes closing all applications, the Shutdown Computer window
appears. This window indicates that it is all right to power off the machine. If the
Shutdown Computer window does not appear within 5 minutes, the Workstation has
encountered a software problem. You must power down the Workstation.

4. Press the Workstation power button

6.5 RESETTING THE WORKSTATION

Use any of the following methods to reset the Workstation. If these methods fail to work,
power down the Workstation and power it back up after approximately 5 minutes.

Using the Command Center

1. Select . The Log Off The System window appears.

2. Select Shutdown the Workstation.

3. Select . The Workstation logs you off, saves all active data and closes all
applications. It can no longer receive information from your information system or the
Analyzer.

Several messages appear, such as the Shutdown in Progress window. When the
Workstation finishes closing all applications, the Shutdown Computer window
appears. This window indicates that it is all right to power off the machine. If the
Shutdown Computer window does not appear within 5 minutes, the Workstation has
encountered a software problem. You must power down the Workstation.

4. Press the Workstation reset button .

Using the Keyboard

1. Press + + . The Windows® 2000 Security window appears.

PN 624602A 6-3
SHUTDOWN
RESETTING THE WORKSTATION

2. Select to shut down the Workstation.

3. Select Restart from the drop down list.

4. Select . The Workstation logs you off, saves all active data and closes all
applications. Several messages appear, such as the Shutdown in Progress window. When
the Workstation finishes closing all applications, it restarts the Workstation.

6-4 PN 624602A
 7OPERATION PRINCIPLES 7
7.1 GENERAL PRINCIPLES
CBC Analysis
The Coulter method accurately counts and sizes cells by detecting and measuring changes in
electrical resistance when a particle (such as a cell) in a conductive liquid passes through a
small aperture.

Figure 7.1 Coulter Method

Each cell suspended in a conductive liquid (diluent) acts as an insulator. As each cell goes
through the aperture, it momentarily increases the resistance of the electrical path between
the submerged electrodes on either side of the aperture. This causes a measurable electronic
pulse. For counting, the vacuum used to pull the diluted suspension of cells through the
aperture must be at a regulated volume.

The number of pulses correlates to the number of particles. The height of the electrical pulse
is proportional to the cell volume.37, 38, 39, 40

Differential Analysis
As the sample, prepared for differential analysis, streams through the flow cell (Figure_2)
these three measurements occur simultaneously on each individual white cell to classify it:

r Low-frequency current measures volume.

r High-frequency current senses cellular internal content through measuring changes in
conductivity.

PN 624602A 7-1
OPERATION PRINCIPLES
GENERAL PRINCIPLES

r Light from the laser bouncing off the individual WBC cells characterizes cellular surface,
shape, and reflectivity.

Figure 7.2 FlowCell

Effect of Reagents
The conductive diluent must affect cells minimally, if at all.

Both lytic reagents must destroy erythrocytes without significantly affecting leukocytes. They
must work rapidly to satisfy the speed with which the system works.

The leukocyte preservative must:

r Provide clear separation of the white blood cell populations

r Preserve leukocytes in their near-native state for accurate cytometric measurement.

Retic Analysis
The Coulter Reticulocyte Method is a two-step sample preparation, followed by analysis in
the LH 500 Hematology Analyzer Retic Mode using volume conductivity and scatter (VCS)
technology. First, a supravital dye, New Methylene Blue, in a special solution (Reagent A), is
incubated with whole blood samples. The dye precipitates the basophilic RNA network found
in reticulocytes. Then, when added to the samples, a hypotonic clearing reagent (Reagent B)
clears hemoglobin and unbound stain from the cells. After the treatment, and if viewed in a

7-2 PN 624602A
 OPERATION PRINCIPLES
SPECIMEN TRANSPORT 7
wet prep microscopically, mature erythrocytes appear as clear, slightly spherical cells.
Reticulocytes have the same characteristics but with darkly-stained reticulum.

Stained reticulocytes differ from mature erythrocytes (RBCs) and other cell populations by
light scatter, direct current measurements, and opacity characteristics.

7.2 SPECIMEN TRANSPORT

Samples in the loading bay are automatically transported, mixed, aspirated, and analyzed.
Sample tubes which can be identified by bar-code labels are loaded into five tube cassettes.
Cassettes and the tube position in the cassette are identified by bar-code labels on the
cassette. You can load up to 25 samples in the LH 500 Hematology Analyzer at one time.

These are the normal steps in specimen transport in an Autoloader:

r Place the cassettes in the loading bay, see Figure_3.

Figure 7.3 Loading Bay

r At the Workstation, instruct the instrument to run samples in the Automatic mode.
r The right lift platform beneath the stacked cassettes rises and the bottom cassette is
deposited on the rocker bed.
r The platform lowers the cassette to the level of the rocker bed where it is rocked back
and forth, mixing the samples.
r The cassette moves along the bed, while rocking, until the first tube reaches the piercing
station.
r The cassette stops moving forward but continues rocking.
t The bar-code scanner reads the Cassette/Position label and the tube label.
t The cassette continues rocking.
t The Autoloader stops if the Cassette/Position label is not read.
r If the labels are read, the bed is brought forward into the piercing position.

PN 624602A 7-3
OPERATION PRINCIPLES
SAMPLE FLOW

r The needle pierces the tube.

r After aspiration, the needle is retracted.
r The bed resumes rocking.
t The bar-code scanner reads the Cassette/ Position label and the tube label a second
time.
t If both bar-code scans are identical, the Autoloader continues to rock and moves the
cassette until the next available tube has reached the piercing station.
t If the bar-code scans are not identical, the Autoloader stops. No data is available for
the sample. The Autoloader continues sampling at the next available tube when
restarted.
r This sequence continues until all tubes in the cassette have been sampled.
r The Autoloader continues rocking and moves the cassette along the bed to the unloading
area.
r Once the cassette has reached the fourth pierce position, the second cassette is lowered
and placed on the rocker_bed.

7.3 SAMPLE FLOW

Normal Sample Flow
1. The appropriate aspiration pump pulls the sample into the BSV (Figure_4):
r 125 µL in the open vial mode
r 185 µL in the closed vial mode.

Figure 7.4 Aspiration Pump

2. The baths drain into the waste chamber (Figure_5).

7-4 PN 624602A
 OPERATION PRINCIPLES
SAMPLE FLOW 7

Figure 7.5 Waste Chamber

3. Figure_6 applies to steps d through h. The BSV rotates to segment three portions of the
sample:
r 1.6 µL for the RBC bath dilution
r 28 µL for the WBC bath dilution
r 28 µL for the WBC diff.
4. The air pump transfers the diff portion to the sample line.
5. Dispensers send diluent to the BSV to pick up and dilute the RBC and WBC portions.
6. The CBC lytic reagent pumps send the CBC lytic reagent (LYSE S III) to the WBC bath. It
lyses the RBCs and converts the hemoglobin into a stable compound.
7. Mixing bubbles enter both baths.

PN 624602A 7-5
OPERATION PRINCIPLES
SAMPLE FLOW

Figure 7.6 BSV (CBC delivery)

8. The BSV rotates back. The Erythrolyse II (PAK LYSE) reagent pumps send the diff lytic
reagent to pick up and deliver the diff portion to the mixing chamber, rupturing red cell
membranes and dissolving cell debris in the process.
The StabiLyse (PAK PRESERVE) reagent pump dispenses diff leukocyte preservative. It
enters the mixing chamber to stabilize the leukocyte subpopulations. See Figure_7.

7-6 PN 624602A
 OPERATION PRINCIPLES
SAMPLE FLOW 7

Figure 7.7 Reagent Pump

9. The vacuum isolators supply vacuum to the baths to pull the sample through the
apertures for the cell counts. The unit counts and sizes RBCs and Plts at the RBC
aperture and WBCs at the WBC aperture.
It measures hemoglobin photometrically through the WBC bath. See Figure_8.

Figure 7.8 WBC Bath

10. The unit does the WBC differential in the triple transducer module (TTM) at the flow
cell aperture.
Sample pressure to the mixing chamber pushes the sample through the flow cell for the
diff analysis. See Figure_9.

PN 624602A 7-7
OPERATION PRINCIPLES
COUNTING AND SIZING

Figure 7.9 Flow Cell Aperture

11. The cycle finishes:

r The mixing chamber drains into its waste chamber.
r The CBC baths drain into the waste chamber.
r The unit cleans the baths and flow cell.
r The waste chambers drain.

Retic Sample Flow

CAUTION Using undiluted whole blood can clog multiple components of the instrument and might require
a service call to clean the components when the LH 500 Hematology Analyzer is in the Retic Mode.
Manually dilute the blood before introducing the sample to the instrument for aspiration when it is in the
Retic Mode.

Placing the instrument in the Retic Mode allows the sample to flow directly to the mixing
chamber and flow cell of the triple transducer module (TTM). When in this mode, the sample
MUST be manually diluted and prepared before being aspirated by the instrument.

7.4 COUNTING AND SIZING

Red and White Blood Cell Counting

Routine Counting
Each bath has one aperture. The regulated vacuum draws a precise volume of sample dilution
through each aperture. At each aperture, the system counts cells in three consecutive periods
of 4 seconds each. During each counting period, the analyzer gathers and amplifies the cell
pulses. It also checks that WBC and RBC data accumulations are above a predetermined low
cut-off value.

7-8 PN 624602A
 OPERATION PRINCIPLES
COUNTING AND SIZING 7
Pulses from the RBC bath that represent cells as 36 fL or greater are classified as red cells.
Pulses from the WBC bath that represent cells as 35_fL or greater are classified as white cells.
Both counts then go to the computer for coincidence correction and voting.

Extended Counting
If accumulations are too low, the unit extends the sensing period. This ensures that the
size-distribution curves accurately reflect the true cell population.

Coincidence Correction
Occasionally, more than one cell goes through the aperture at the same time. When cells
coincide, however, the analyzer counts only one pulse. Because the frequency of coincidence
is proportional to the actual count, the system easily corrects results for coincidence.

Triplicate Counting/Voting
The LH 500 Hematology Analyzer uses triplicate counting, strict voting criteria, and
proprietary flagging algorithms to confirm parameter results prior to reporting. After
coincidence correction, the system compares the data from the three count periods then votes
and rejects any questionable data. Voting occurs for: WBC, RBC, Plt, MCV, RDW, and MPV. If
the system finds disagreement among all the count periods or some other internal criteria are
not met, the system displays and prints a total voteout code (– – – – –) instead of the
parameter result.

IMPORTANT In rare instances, especially for specimens where fibrin, cell fragments, or other debris are
likely to occur, such as pediatric and oncology specimens, a transient or partial aperture blockage may not
be detected by any of these methods. Therefore, verify flagged results for accuracy and review any result
which exceeds your laboratory action limits.

Beckman Coulter uses triplicate counting and voting to maximize the accuracy of the results.

Sweep Flow
The sweep flow is a steady stream of diluent that flows behind the RBC aperture during the
sensing periods (B). This keeps cells from swirling back into the sensing zone. Because these
swirling cells (A) would be peripherally sensed, their pulse height would be similar to Plt
pulse heights. See Figure_3.10.

PN 624602A 7-9
OPERATION PRINCIPLES
COUNTING AND SIZING

Figure 7.10 Sweep Flow

Pulse Editing
When cells pass through the aperture near the edge or at an angle rather than at the center,
they create atypical pulses. Pulse editing technology eliminates atypical pulses from the
analysis because they distort the true size of the cell. This prevents atypical pulses from
influencing size measurements.

RBC Count and Size Distribution

During RBC sensing, pulses that represent cells from 36 fL to 360 fL are classified as RBCs
and are sorted by size into 256 channels to build the RBC histogram. Using a system of
moving averages, the computer smooths the histogram curve.

Plt Count and Size Distribution

During RBC sensing, pulses that represent cells from 2 to 20 fL are classified as platelets. The
system automatically extends the sensing time if platelet accumulation is below a
predetermined level. The system sorts the Plt pulses by size into 64 channels to build the Plt
histogram.

Plt Fitting Process

The Platelet Algorithm smooths the platelet histogram from each aperture. The algorithm
then finds a maximum (mode) point and two minimum points (valleys) in each smoothed
histogram. The minimum points are located to the left and the right of the maximum point.
The algorithm uses all the information in the raw histogram within the two minimum points
to fit an extrapolated curve to the log-normal smoothed curve, using a least-squares fit
method.

7-10 PN 624602A
 OPERATION PRINCIPLES
SCATTERPLOT DEVELOPMENT 7
The Algorithm verifies that each of the fitted curves:

1. Is positive and unimodal

2. Has a mode between 3 and 15 fL
3. Has a PDW less than 20. (NOTE: This is an approximate value since the measurement is
made before results are scaled for calibration.)
4. Has a ratio between the raw and fitted histograms mode amplitudes of less than 1.5
5. Has a ratio between channels 0 and 1 and the mode amplitudes of less than 1.5
6. Has a plt count approximately greater than 20.
If any of these conditions are not met, the algorithm derives the platelet count from the
portion of the raw histogram between the two minimum points.

Condition 5 above causes generation of a Plt no-fit condition where the Plt is flagged with a
Review (R) flag, and the 'Low Plt Interference' message is displayed on the Research screen.
Additionally, Plt results are Review (R) flagged when the 'High Plt Interference' flag occurs
(the text message is displayed on the Research screen).

7.5 SCATTERPLOT DEVELOPMENT

The system performs a series of operations on the stored digital raw data values to identify
subpopulations and calculate percentage values. It also produces the scatterplot displays for
visual representation of the WBC and Reticulocyte/RBC populations. A scatterplot is a
two-dimensional graphic display of the results of the volume, conductivity, and scatter
measurements.

Differential-Related
The scatterplot, Figure 11, shows lymphocyte {circle key 4}, monocyte {circle key 1},
neutrophil {circle key 2}, and eosinophil {circle key 3} populations. The basophil population
is behind the upper right quadrant of the lymphocyte {circle key 4} population.

PN 624602A 7-11
OPERATION PRINCIPLES
SCATTERPLOT DEVELOPMENT

Figure 7.11 DF 1 Scatterplot

Retic-Related
Figure 12, this graph shows the mature red blood cell population {circle key 1} and the
reticulocyte population {circle key 2}.

Figure 7.12 Retic Population

7-12 PN 624602A
 OPERATION PRINCIPLES
SCATTERPLOT DEVELOPMENT 7
Retic Parameters
The system makes three measurements as each cell passes through the flow-cell aperture:

r The low-frequency, impedance measurement (which defines the cell's volume)

r The high-frequency impedance measurement (which indicates the cell's internal
conductivity)
r The light-scatter measurement (which indicates the cell's structure and shape).

Derived and Computed Parameters

From directly-measured parameters, the computer derives:

r MCV and RDW from the RBC histogram

r MPV and Plt count from the Plt histogram.
From derived and directly-measured parameters, the computer computes Hct, MCH, and
MCHC.

Hgb CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT

After the WBC dilution is lysed, the system shines a beam of white light through the WBC
aperture bath and then through an optical filter. This transmittance of light (525 nm
wavelength) through a standard path length of Hgb solution is compared to the transmittance
of such light in the same way through a reagent blank. The system converts this ratio to
absorbance. It then converts absorbance to Hgb values in g/dL using a calibration factor.

PARAMETERS AND THEIR DERIVATION

Mathematical expressions in this section are in US units of measurement. You can change
parameter units to any of four International Systems of Units or the Japanese system by using
the Reporting Units screen. See the Heading, Reporting Units, in the Operator's Guide.

White Blood Cell (WBC) Count

This is the number of leukocytes measured directly, multiplied by the calibration constant,
and expressed as

Red Blood Cell (RBC)

This is the number of erythrocytes measured directly, multiplied by the calibration constant,
and expressed as

Hemoglobin (Hgb) Concentration

Weight (mass) of hemoglobin determined from the degree of absorbance found through
photocurrent transmittance is:

PN 624602A 7-13
OPERATION PRINCIPLES
SCATTERPLOT DEVELOPMENT

Mean Corpuscular Volume (MCV)

This is the average volume of individual erythrocytes derived from the RBC histogram. The
system:

r Multiplies the number of RBCs in each channel by the size of the RBCs in that channel.
r Adds the products of each channel between 36 fL and 360 fL.
r Divides that sum by the total number of RBCs between 36 fL and 360 fL.
r Multiplies by a calibration constant and expresses MCV in femtoliters.

Hematocrit (Hct)
This is the relative volume of packed erythrocytes to whole blood, computed as:

Mean Corpuscular Hemoglobin (MCH)

This is the weight of hemoglobin in the average erythrocyte count, computed as:

Mean Corpuscular Hemoglobin Concentration (MCHC)

This is the average weight of hemoglobin in a measured dilution, computed as:

Red Distribution Width (RDW)

RDW represents the size distribution spread of the erythrocyte population derived from the
RBC histogram. It is the coefficient of variation (CV), expressed in percent, of the RBC size
distribution.

Platelet (Plt) Count

This is the number of thrombocytes derived from the Plt histogram and multiplied by a
calibration constant. This number is expressed as:

Mean Platelet Volume (MPV)

MPV is the average volume of individual platelets derived from the Plt histogram. It
represents the mean volume of the Plt population under the fitted Plt curve multiplied by a
calibration constant, and expressed in femtoliters.

7-14 PN 624602A
 OPERATION PRINCIPLES
SCATTERPLOT DEVELOPMENT 7
Differential Counts

Percentages
The percentages of leukocytes from each category are derived from the scatterplot.

Absolute Numbers
The absolute numbers of leukocytes in each category are computed from the WBC count and
the differential percentage parameters.

Reticulocyte (Retic) Parameters

A graphic display of cell populations in a scatterplot form is available for reporting. A flag
indicates the sample needs further investigation. Results then should be interpreted by a
physician or other qualified, medical professional.

Reticulocyte Percent (RET%)

This is the number of reticulocytes per 100 RBCs. This parameter is directly measured and
reported as %, a percentage of RBCs.

PN 624602A 7-15
OPERATION PRINCIPLES
SCATTERPLOT DEVELOPMENT

Reticulocyte Absolute Number (RET#)

This is the absolute number of reticulocytes. It is calculated from the reticulocyte percent
(RET%) and red cell (RBC) count. It is expressed as the number of reticulocytes per liter and
reported in the same units selected by the user for RBC.

On the LH 500 Series, you can enter the red cell count manually, via data base explorer, if you
want the absolute number result. For more information, see Cycling Retic Samples topic.

Mean Reticulocyte Volume (MRV)

The average volume of individual reticulocytes derived using VCS reticulocyte algorithm. It is
calculated and is reported in femoliters.

The MRV parameter is the average volume of all reticulocytes (or the mean volume of all retic
events). It is calculated from the RET% and reported in femoliters (fL).

The MRV algorithm is shown below:

Immature reticulocyte fraction (IRF)

The percentage of the count of the highest light scatter reticulocytes relative to the total count
of the reticulocytes is calculated and is reported optionally as a decimal ratio.

The IRF parameter is an indication of new reticulocyte synthesis. It is calculated from the
RET% as the total number of reticulocyte events in the outermost light scattering region,
corresponding to immature reticulocytes, relative to the total number of reticulocytes and is
reported as this ratio.

The algorithm for calculating the IRF parameter is shown below:

7-16 PN 624602A
 OPERATION PRINCIPLES
METHOD HISTORY 7
7.6 METHOD HISTORY
Development

W.H. Coulter (1956) describes the Coulter Principle:4

A suspension of blood cells is passed thru a small orifice simultaneously with an electric
current. The individual blood cells passing thru the orifice introduce an impedance
change in the orifice determined by the size of the cell. The system counts the individual
cells and provides cell size distribution. The number of cells counted per sample is
approximately 100 times greater than the usual microscope count to reduce the
statistical error by a factor of approximately 10 times.
This substantial improvement in precision over previous methods helped to establish the
erythrocyte count as a sensitive index of erythropoietic dyscrasia, particularly when
considered together with Hct and Hgb measurements.5

The COULTER COUNTER® Model S analyzer was the first instrument that automated
simultaneous multiparameter measurements on blood. Brittin et_al., Gottmann, and
Hamilton and Davidson, reviewed the performance and clinical value of the Model S.6, 7, 8

Refinements of the COULTER COUNTER analyzer to provide accurate size (volume)

distribution data led to a reawakening of interest in pathological erythrocyte size distribution,
first aroused by Price-Jones in 1922.9, 10

Among the advantages offered by the Coulter method of counting and sizing was the ability
to derive an accurate Hct measurement by summing the electronic volume of erythrocytes.
England et al. speculated that electronic Hct measurements did not have the trapped plasma
error of centrifugal Hct measurements.11

Bull et al. described the use of a COULTER COUNTER analyzer for counting thrombocytes.12
This method, useful as it was, depended on preparing thrombocyte-rich plasma to avoid
counting erythrocytes as thrombocytes. Mundschenk et al. and Schulz and Thom discussed
the possibility of counting thrombocytes in the presence of erythrocytes and classifying them
by size.13, 14 Electronic refinements in the Model S-PLUS™ enhanced the accuracy of the
hydrodynamic method. Von Behrens and Paulus also cited the feasibility of counting
thrombocytes by the Coulter method.15, 16

Hemoglobinometry
The lytic reagent used for the complete blood count (CBC) parameters prepares the blood so
the system can count leukocytes and sense the amount of hemoglobin. The lytic reagent
rapidly and simultaneously destroys the erythrocytes and converts a substantial proportion of
the hemoglobin to a stable pigment while it leaves leukocyte nuclei intact. The absorbance of
the pigment is directly proportional to the hemoglobin concentration of the sample.

The accuracy of this method equals that of the hemiglobincyanide method, the reference
method of choice for hemoglobinometry recommended by the International Committee for
Standardization in Hematology (ICSH).17

PN 624602A 7-17
OPERATION PRINCIPLES
METHOD HISTORY

Differential Measurement
The COULTER VCS established WBC differential technology using three measurements:
individual cell volume, high-frequency conductivity, and laser-light scatter.

The combination of low-frequency current, high-frequency current, and light-scattering

technology provides abundant cell-by-cell information that is translated by the instrument
into conventional stained film leukocyte categories. Correlation between the frequency of the
different cell types using stained film microscopy and this system is greater than 0.9 for
lymphocytes and granulocytes, and 0.7 for mononuclear cells.

Volume Analysis
Electronic leukocyte volume analysis, using low-frequency current, has been used since
1967.18 It has been evaluated as a possible adjunct to the differential white cell
count.19,_20,_21,_22

Conductivity Analysis
Cell walls act as conductors to high-frequency current. As the current passes through the cell
walls and through each cell interior, it detects differences in the insulating properties of cell
components. The current characterizes the nuclear and granular constituents and the
chemical composition of the cell interior.23, 24, 25

Light Scatter Analysis

Beckman Coulter's experience in flow cytometry dates back decades to Fulwyler's pioneering
use of light scatter for cell analysis.26 Loken et al. and Jovin et al. discuss the relationship of
particle size and refractivity to the angle of light scattered from a laser beam.27

Reticulocyte (Retic) Analysis

Reticulocytes are immature, nonnucleated erythrocytes retaining a small network of
basophilic organelles, comprised of RNA and protoporphyrin. The enumeration of
reticulocytes provides a simple, effective means to determine red cell production and
regeneration.28, 29, 30, 31

The most common means of measuring reticulocytes is to use supravital dyes, such as New
Methylene Blue or Brilliant Cresyl Blue. These dyes precipitate and aggregate the basophilic
substances within the reticulocyte, resulting in a granular, staining pattern easily seen with
light microscopy.32

XB Analysis
Dennis B. Dorsey, MD, proposed in 1963 that the relatively constant blood cell indices could
be used to follow the performance of hematology instrumentation.33 Brian Bull, MD,
improved the technique and named it Analysis.34

Analysis uses a "weighted moving average" of patient sample results because Koepke said
that QC materials "ideally should be similar in structure and in reactivity to the patient
constituent being measured, [and] therefore freshly drawn patient blood samples seem to be
the most appropriate [QC material]."35 Bull explains, "The analyser [sic] is considered to be
‘in control’ when the MCV, MCH, and MCHC determined on a batch of 20 patients by use of
the algorithm are within 3% of the expected mean indices of the population."36

7-18 PN 624602A
 8SETUP 8
8.1 SYSTEM SETUP OVERVIEW
Your COULTER LH 500 Series provides a lot of flexibility in setup. You can tailor the way
your system appears and runs to suit your laboratory's needs. Select a button on the System
Setup window to access different setup options you can set to control the processing on your

Workstation. Select to temporarily override setup options.

Some buttons on the System Setup window may appear gray and inactive depending on the
security level of the user name currently logged on. If you need to access an inactive function,
contact your laboratory administrator.

Select To Set Up
General settings, such as display labels, parameters, reporting units
and reports.

Quality Assurance options, such as reagent log, setting up new

control lots, control values and lab limits.

Methods, such as flagging limits and decision rules, for handling

results

A list of valid locations associated with samples.

A list of valid physicians associated with samples.

Address and phone number for your institution for reporting

purposes.

Communications with information systems and knowledge-based

systems.

PN 624602A 8-1
SETUP
CHANGING REAGENT INFORMATION

Your password.

Limits for data storage in the DataBase.

Workstation user names.

Windows® 2000 Control Panel settings.

8.2 CHANGING REAGENT INFORMATION

1. If the Quality Assurance Setup window, Reagent Tab is not already visible:

a. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

b. Select to display the Quality Assurance Setup window.

c. Select to display the reagent information you can change.

2. If Beckman Coulter Inc. is the manufacturer of the reagent, ensure the Beckman Coulter
Reagent column appears selected ( ).

3. Type the lot number for the reagent and press .

4. Note: Press to reuse the lot number.The Workstation automatically fills the Date
Opened and the Use Before fields with the appropriate dates.
5. Type the shelf life expiration for the reagent.
6. Verify the open expiration date.
7. If your laboratory has not set up open expiration times, type the Beckman Coulter or the
other manufacturer expiration time.
8. Select:

8-2 PN 624602A
 SETUP
SETTING UP CONTROLS 8
To save the changes. The Workstation stores the changes and updates
the date last modified and the user name. The Workstation also
updates the Reagents history log.
Another tab To change additional Quality Assurance Setup information. The
Workstation asks you if you want to save the changes you made to the

current information. Select to proceed.

8.3 SETTING UP CONTROLS

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as an Advanced
Operator or a Lab Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory
administrator.

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the Quality Assurance Setup window.

3. Select to display the control information already set up for your

instrument.

4. Select . The Setup New Controls Folder window appears.

5. Select the source of the control materials.
6. Select the type of control.
7. Select the level of the control you want to set up.

8. Select to specify the reference values and ranges for the control. The window you
see varies depending on the source and type of control you selected.
9. Perform one of the following depending on the source and type of control:

This Control Do This

Beckman Coulter (non-latex) Follow the instructions on the Diskette Entry of
Lot Specific Information window.
Other (non-latex) Specify non-latex reference values.
Latex Specify latex reference values.
Retic Follow the displayed Manual Control Setup screen.

10. If desired, select to set up lab limits for the control.

PN 624602A 8-3
SETUP
SETTING UP CONTROLS

Note: A reference RBC is used to calculate the reticulocyte absolute number for Retic
only samples.
11. Select

To return to the System Setup window.

Another tab To change additional Quality Assurance Setup information. The

Workstation asks you if you want to save the changes you made to the

current information. Select to proceed.

12. If you want to stop the processing of samples automatically based on Controls, specify
the AutoStop details.

Specifying Latex Reference Values

Note: Before performing this procedure, you must perform steps 1 through 8 of Setting Up
Controls.

1. Specify whether or not you want results automatically transmitted to your information
system.

2. Type the lot number of the latex control and press .

3. Type the expiration date of the control and press .

4. Specify whether you want to use this lot number as a default.
5. Type the values in the appropriate fields:
r Diff Mode Parameters
r Retic Mode Parameters
6. Select

To save the reference values and return to the Setup New

Control Folder window.

To return to the Setup New Control Folder window without

saving changes.

Deleting Control Setup Information

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as an Advanced
Operator or a Lab Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory
administrator.

8-4 PN 624602A
 SETUP
SETTING UP CONTROLS 8

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup application.

2. Select . The Quality Assurance Setup window appears.

3. Select to display the Controls window.

4. Select the control setup information you want to delete in the Existing Controls table.

5. Select to delete the information.

6. Verify the information you want to delete and select . The Workstation deletes all
the control setup information, including lab limits.
7. Select

To return to the System Setup window.

Another tab To change additional Quality Assurance Setup information. The

Workstation asks you if you want to save the changes you made to the

current information. Select to proceed.

Editing Control Setup Information

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as an Advanced
Operator or a Lab Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory
administrator.

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the Quality Assurance Setup window.

3. Select to display the control information already set up for your

instrument.
4. Select the existing control you want to edit.
5. Select

PN 624602A 8-5
SETUP
SETTING UP CONTROLS

This To Edit This

Reference values

Lab limits

6. Edit the values as needed:

For Reference Values
AutoStop
Auto-Transmit
Assigned Values
Expected Values
Diff Mode Parameters
Retic Mode Parameters

For Lab Limits

Limit Value

7. Select to save the reference values and return to the list of existing controls set up
for your laboratory.
8. Select:

To return to the System Setup window.

Another tab To change additional Quality Assurance Setup information. The

Workstation asks you if you want to save the changes you made to the

current information. Select to proceed.

Setting Up Lab Limits for Controls

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as an Advanced
Operator or a Lab Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory
administrator.

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

8-6 PN 624602A
 SETUP
SETTING UP CONTROLS 8

2. Select to display the Quality Assurance Setup window.

3. If available, select a control folder with the source, type, and level of the lab limits you
want to set up, otherwise, you must set up a control.

4. Select to display Lab Limits Setup window.

5. Type your laboratory's limit value for each parameter.

6. Use to move between fields.

7. Select

To save the lab limits and return to the existing controls list.

To return to the previous window without saving changes.

8. If you returned to the existing controls list, select:

To return to the System Setup window.

Another tab To change additional Quality Assurance Setup information. The

Workstation asks you if you want to save the changes you made

to the current information. Select to proceed.

Deleting Lab Limits

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the Quality Assurance Setup window.

3. Delete all control folders with the source, type, and level of the lab limits you want to
delete. The Workstation deletes the associated lab limits.

PN 624602A 8-7
SETUP
SETTING UP XB ANALYSIS

8.4 SETTING UP XB ANALYSIS

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as an Advanced
Operator or a Lab Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory
administrator.

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the Quality Assurance Setup window.

3. Select to display the XB setup information for the instrument.

4. If you want XB Analysis information to print automatically, specify the auto-print details.
5. If you want to stop the processing of samples automatically based on XB Analysis, specify
the AutoStop details.

6. Type the target and limit values for each parameter. Use to move between
fields.
7. Select:

To save the changes. The Workstation stores the changes and updates
the date last modified and the user name. The changes to XB Analysis
take effect with the next batch you process.
Another tab To change additional Quality Assurance Setup information. The
Workstation asks you if you want to save the changes you made to the

current information. Select to proceed.

8.5 SETTING UP SHIFTS FOR CONTROLS

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as an Advanced
Operator or a Lab Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory
administrator.

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the Quality Assurance Setup window.

3. Select to display the shift setup information for the instrument.

4. Select Multiple Shifts. The three sets of shift fields become active.

8-8 PN 624602A
 SETUP
SETTING UP DISPLAY LABELS FOR REPORTING 8
5. Type the start times for each shift. The Workstation automatically changes the end times
for you.

6. Press to move from field to field.

7. Select:

To save the changes. The Workstation stores the changes and updates
the date last modified and the user name. When you review workload
reports, the information now appears based on the shifts you specified.
Another tab To change additional Quality Assurance Setup information. The
Workstation asks you if you want to save the changes you made to the

current information. Select to proceed.

8.6 SETTING UP DISPLAY LABELS FOR REPORTING

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as a Lab
Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory administrator.

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the Patient Setup window.

3. Select to display the Display Labels that currently appear on reports and
Workstation windows.
4. Verify that the appropriate positive identifier for your laboratory appears selected.
5. For each identifier, type the label you would like to appear, next to the data associated
with the field, when it appears on your Workstation or on a report.
6. Select:

To save the changes. The Workstation stores the changes and updates
the date last modified and the user name. The Workstation windows
update immediately. The next report that prints contains the new
labels you provided.
Another tab To change additional Patient Setup information. The Workstation asks
you if you want to save the changes you made to the current

information. Select to proceed.

PN 624602A 8-9
SETUP
SETTING UP A POSITIVE IDENTIFIER

8.7 SETTING UP A POSITIVE IDENTIFIER

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as a Lab
Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory administrator.

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the Patient Setup window.

3. Select to access the Display Labels information.

4. Select the positive identifier for your laboratory.
5. If you would like to change display labels for each identifier, type the label you want to
display next to the data associated with the field when it appears on your Workstation or
on a report.
6. Select:

To save the changes. The Workstation stores the changes and updates
the date last modified and the user name. The next sample cycled will
use the positive identifier you specified.
Another tab To change additional Patient Setup information. The Workstation asks
you if you want to save the changes you made to the current

information. Select to proceed.

8.8 SETTING UP AUTOSEQUENCING

1. Select on the Command Center to display the Patient Tests application.

2. Select to add a sample request to the ToDo list.

3. Select to display the AutoSequencing window.

4. Select the level at which you want to control AutoSequencing.
5. At the patient and test levels, for each identifier you want AutoSequenced:
a. Select the identifier—
r Patient Sequence Number
r Patient ID
r Sample ID
r Cass/Pos

8-10 PN 624602A
 SETUP
SPECIFYING THE PARAMETERS YOU WANT TO REPORT 8

b. Type the AutoSequence starting number. Use to move between fields.

6. Select to save the sequence starting numbers. The next time the Workstation
requires a sequence number, it uses the numbers you saved.

8.9 SPECIFYING THE PARAMETERS YOU WANT TO REPORT

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as a Lab
Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory administrator.

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the Patient Setup window.

3. Select to display the parameters available on the LH 500 Series.

4. If you want to include research parameters on Workstation windows, select .

This button invokes a certification process required by the U.S. Food and Drug
Administration (FDA).
5. Specify each parameter you want to appear on reports.
6. Select:

To save the changes. The Workstation stores the changes and updates
the date last modified and the user name. The Workstation windows,
such as the Results & Graphics window, update immediately. The next
report that prints contains the parameters you specified.
Another tab To change additional Patient Setup information. The Workstation asks
you if you want to save the changes you made to the current

information. Select to proceed.

Certifying Research Parameters

1. After selecting , the Workstation displays a User Agreement Notice. Read the
notice.

PN 624602A 8-11
SETUP
SETTING UP REPORTING UNITS

2. Select . The Certification Form window appears.

3. Check that the institution details are correct.
4. Type your name.
5. Type your title.
Note: The Workstation reads the user and computer name from the current logon
information.

6. Select to print the certification information.

7. Mail the certification information to Beckman Coulter Inc.

8. Select to save the changes.

9. Select to close the User Agreement Notice window.

8.10 SETTING UP REPORTING UNITS

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as a Lab
Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory administrator.

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the Patient Setup window.

3. Select to display the reporting information for your Workstation.

4. Select the reporting units format for your laboratory. You can create formats SI5, SI6 and
SI7 by selecting CUSTOM and then specify the units for each parameter.
5. Specify the groups of parameters you want to display with an extra digit.
Note: You must reset the Workstation after each time you select or deselect extra digit.
Results, and the calculations performed on those results, appear as a preset number of
decimal places on the screen. However, the Workstation uses more decimal places than it
displays and rounds off to the result you see on the screen.
6. Select:

To save the changes. The Workstation stores the changes and updates
the date last modified and the user name. The Workstation updates the
reporting units immediately.

8-12 PN 624602A
 SETUP
SETTING UP FLAGGING LIMITS 8
Another tab To change additional Patient Setup information. The Workstation asks
you if you want to save the changes you made to the current

information. Select to proceed.

8.11 SETTING UP FLAGGING LIMITS

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as a Lab
Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory administrator.

IMPORTANT Flagging is evaluated when the sample is analyzed. Flagging is reevaluated for a sample when
the results are manually edited, or when new results are received for a pending sample. Flagging is not
reevaluated upon a change of flagging limits for results already in the database. Delta check and Reflex
Decision Rules are not reevaluated.
Beckman Coulter suggests using all available flagging options to optimize the sensitivity of instrument
results. All flagging options include reference ranges (H/L), action and critical limits, definitive flags,
suspect flags, parameter codes, delta checks, decision rules and system alarms. Beckman Coulter
recommends avoiding the use of single messages or outputs to summarize specimen results or patient
conditions.

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the Patient Setup window.

3. Select to display the list of flagging limits set up for your laboratory.

4. Select to create a new limit.

5. Type the name you want associated with the attributes you specify.
6. Specify the location you want associated with the limit.
7. Specify the age range you want associated with the limit.
Note: Use the age range monitor to ensure you do not specify overlapping ranges for the
same location.

8. Select on the Setup New Limit Set window to save the limit name, location and
age range.
9. Select the limit name that you want to set the flagging limits for.

10. Select and display the Laboratory Flagging Limits Setup window.
11. Specify whether you want to Auto Validate the results that match this limit.

PN 624602A 8-13
SETUP
SETTING UP FLAGGING LIMITS

12. Type the lower and upper limits for each parameter of the default Male category. Use

to move between fields.

13. Select:

Female To define low and high limits for samples originating from a
female and whether you want to AutoVerify the results that match
this list.
Action Limits To define low and high limits for samples that require action by
your laboratory and whether you want to AutoVerify the results
that match this list.
Critical Limits To define low and high limits for samples that are critical and
require immediate action by your laboratory and whether you
want to AutoVerify the results that match this list.
Definitive Limits To identify the definitive messages you want to appear and
whether you want to AutoVerify the results that match this list.
14. Repeat steps 9 through 12 for each category you want to use for this limit name.

15. Select . The Workstation saves the limit information with the limit name and
returns you to the Flagging Limits tab on the Patient Setup window. The Workstation
flags future sample results based on the attributes you specified. If you review existing
results in the database, they appear with the OLD attributes.
16. Select:

To close the Patient Setup window and return to the System Setup
window.

Another tab To change additional Patient Setup information. The Workstation asks
you if you want to save the changes you made to the current

information. Select to proceed.

Defining Definitive Messages

1. Specify whether you want to Auto Validate the results that match this limit.
2. Specify each definitive message you want to appear when a result exceeds its default
limit.
3. If necessary, specify the gradient morphology comments for the parameter.

Editing Existing Flagging Limits

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as a Lab
Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory administrator.

8-14 PN 624602A
 SETUP
SETTING UP RULES FOR FLAGGING SAMPLE RESULTS 8

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the Patient Setup window.

3. Select to display the list of flagging limits already set up for your
laboratory.
4. Select the limit name you want to edit.
5. Select:

To change the limits.

To change the location or age associated with the limit.

6. Modify as appropriate:
r Auto Validation Criteria
r Lower
r Upper
r Limits that you want to force the display of definitive messages.

7. Select to save the attributes with the limit name and return the list of existing
flagging limits. The Workstation flags future sample results based on the attributes you
specified. If you review existing results in the database, they appear with the OLD
attributes.
8. Select:

To close the Patient Setup window and return to the System Setup
window.

Another tab To change additional Patient Setup information. The Workstation asks
you if you want to save the changes you made to the current

information. Select to proceed.

8.12 SETTING UP RULES FOR FLAGGING SAMPLE RESULTS

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as a Lab
Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory administrator.

PN 624602A 8-15
SETUP
SETTING UP RULES FOR FLAGGING SAMPLE RESULTS

IMPORTANT Flagging is evaluated when the sample is analyzed. Flagging is reevaluated for a sample when
the results are manually edited, or when new results are received for a pending sample. Flagging is not
reevaluated upon a change of flagging limits for results already in the database. Delta check and Reflex
Decision Rules are not reevaluated.
Beckman Coulter suggests using all available flagging options to optimize the sensitivity of instrument
results. All flagging options include reference ranges (H/L), action and critical limits, definitive flags,
suspect flags, parameter codes, delta checks, decision rules and system alarms. Beckman Coulter
recommends avoiding the use of single messages or outputs to summarize specimen results or patient
conditions.

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the Patient Setup window.

3. Select to display a list of the existing rules set up for your

laboratory.

4. Select to set up the rule environment.

5. Select to create a new rule.

6. Specify the rule name.
7. Specify the type of rule.
8. Specify a Rule Short Title.

IMPORTANT REVIEW YOUR DECISION RULES THAT CONTAIN MULTIPLE PARAMETERS. If you create a
rule that has more than one parameter or contains more than one item that is related to a parameter, all of
the parameters included in the rule (even if an OR condition is used) must also be included in the
parameters reported in your report profile. Refer to Example A.

9. Define the delta check criteria or the reflex manager criteria.

10. Select to return to the Patient Setup Decision Rules & Criteria tab.

11. Use and to prioritize the decision rules.

12. Select:

or in the enabled column. To enable or disable decision rules individually.

8-16 PN 624602A
 SETUP
SETTING UP RULES FOR FLAGGING SAMPLE RESULTS 8
To close the Patient Setup window and return to
the System Setup window. The Workstation tests
for the rule you defined the next time it receives a
sample result.
Another tab To change additional Patient Setup information.
The Workstation asks you if you want to save the
changes you made to the current information.

Select to proceed.

Note: If decision rules are to be used for sample flagging, the decision rules must be
enabled on the Decision Rules & Criteria screen and Decision Criteria must be
enabled on the Run Configuration screen

Defining Delta Check Criteria

Note: To perform this task, you must first perform steps 1 through 8 of setting up rules for
flagging limits.

1. Select which sample result (day) you want to check.

2. Specify the parameter you want to check.
3. Select the operator you want used for the criterion.
4. Specify the value you want used for the criterion.
5. If you want more than one condition included in this criterion, specify the logical
operator you want to use.
6. If you want more than one condition included in this criterion, repeat steps 1 through 5
up to two times.
7. Specify the rule action you want used.
8. Specify if you want to add to the slide list.

9. Select to save the criterion.

Defining Reflex Manager Criteria

Note: To perform this task, you must first perform steps 1 through 8 of setting up rules for
flagging limits.

1. Specify an item you want to check.

IMPORTANT REVIEW YOUR DECISION RULES THAT CONTAIN MULTIPLE PARAMETERS. If you create a
rule that has more than one parameter or contains more than one item that is related to a parameter, all of
the parameters included in the rule (even if an OR condition is used) must also be included in the
parameters reported in your report profile. Refer to Example A.

2. If you selected a parameter:

a. Select the operator you want used for the criterion.

PN 624602A 8-17
SETUP
SETTING UP REPORTS

b. Specify the value you want used for the criterion.

3. If you want more than one condition included in this criterion, specify the logical
operator you want to use.
4. If you want more than one condition included in this criterion, repeat steps 1 through 3
up to two times.
5. Specify the rule action you want used.

6. Select to save the criterion with the criterion name you specified.

Setting Up the Rule Environment

Note: To perform this task, you must first perform steps 1 through 3 of setting up rules for
flagging limits.

When you select on the Decision Rules & Criteria Setup window, you can set up
characteristics for the Reflex Manager and for delta checking.

Reflex Manager
1. Type a message you want used as a rule action.

2. Select to save the message.

3. Select where you want sample results that match the rule to appear.

Delta Check
1. Specify the time limit for delta checking.
2. Specify the unique patient identifier to use for delta checking.
3. Specify where you want sample results that match the delta checking criteria to appear.

After setting up the Reflex Manager and Delta Check characteristics, select to save the
changes and return to the Decision Rules & Criteria Setup window.

8.13 SETTING UP REPORTS

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as a Lab
Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory administrator.

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the Patient Setup window.

8-18 PN 624602A
 SETUP
SETTING UP INSTITUTION DETAILS 8
3. Select to display the content for each report defined for your
Workstation.
4. For each report number (tabs 1 through 7):
a. Specify report format you want used.
b. If necessary, specify whether you want a chartable or laboratory report.
c. Specify the printout options.
5. For each report number (tabs 8 through 10):
a. Select the parameters you want included for printing and transmission.
b. Specify report format you want used.
c. If necessary, specify whether you want a chartable or laboratory report.
d. Specify the printout options.
6. Select:

To close the Patient Setup window and return to the System Setup
window. The next report the Workstation prints uses the items you
selected.
Another tab To change additional Patient Setup information. The Workstation asks
you if you want to save the changes you made to the current

information. Select to proceed.

7. If you want your institution’s information, such as name and address, to appear on the
report, verify the Institution Details Setup.

8.14 SETTING UP INSTITUTION DETAILS

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as a Lab
Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory administrator.

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the Institution Details window.

3. Type the name of your laboratory.
4. Type the name of your laboratory director.
5. Type the mailing address of your laboratory.
6. Type the city where your laboratory is located.
7. Type the state where your laboratory is located.
8. Type the zip code where your laboratory is located.
9. Type the country where your laboratory is located.

PN 624602A 8-19
SETUP
SETTING UP LIS / HIS COMMUNICATIONS

10. Type the phone number for your laboratory.

11. Type your laboratory's IQAP number.
12. Type your laboratory's account number.
13. For each type of information, specify whether you want the information to appear in the
header of printed reports. The header appears on all reports.

14. Select: to close the Institution window and return to the System Setup window.
The next time you print a report, the institution details you specified appear in the
header of the report.

8.15 SETTING UP LIS / HIS COMMUNICATIONS

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as a Lab
Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory administrator.

Consult with your information system administrator to ensure you have the correct
information to perform this procedure. Also ensure your information system administrator
has the latest Host Transmission manual, PN 4277303.

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the Communications window.

3. Select to display the communications settings for transmitting data from your
instrument to your information system.
4. Select whether to transmit validation codes to your information system.
5. Select whether to Replace DLE E with DLE C in the standard data set transmitted to your
information system.
6. Select whether to enable Replace V and v Flags with R in the standard data set
transmitted to your information system.
7. Select the time out interval you want used.
8. Select the baud rate your information system can receive.
9. Select the type of parity you want used for communications with your information
system.
10. Select the stop bits for your information system.
11. Select the data bits you want used for transmission to your information system.
12. Select the block size for transmissions to your information system.
13. Select the data format for compatibility.
14. If a handshake with your information system is necessary, verify that Handshake is
turned on.

8-20 PN 624602A
 SETUP
SETTING UP LIS / HIS COMMUNICATIONS 8
15. Select Collate ToDo List to enable the ability to request additional tests for the same
patient.
16. If you specified the LH 500 Series compatibility format, specify the graphics data you
want to transmit to your information system.
17. Select:

To close the Communications Setup window and return to the System

Setup window. The next time the Workstation transmits a result to
your information system, it transmits the result with the settings you
specified.
Another tab To change additional Communications Setup information. The
Workstation asks you if you want to save the changes you made to the

current information. Select to proceed.

Setting Up Auto Validation

Before performing this procedure, read the Auto Validation Overview so that you understand
how the LH 500 Series software assigns validation codes to sample results.

1. Enable the Auto Validation codes on the Communications screen if you want the
validation codes to be transmitted to your information system.
2. Enable Auto Validation Criteria on the Flagging Limits Setup screen.
3. Setup Decision rules for your laboratory. If Decision Rules are enabled and a decision
rule is met for a sample, this will cause an Auto Validation failure.

IMPORTANT REVIEW DECISION RULES THAT CONTAIN MULTIPLE PARAMETERS. If you create a rule
that has more than one parameter or contains more than one item that is related to a parameter, all of the
parameters included in the rule (even if an OR condition is used) must also be included in the parameters
reported in your report profile. Refer to Example A.

Example A:

Rule Setup: Reflex rule is defined as "If WBC is < 2.0 OR Hgb is < 6.0 then
Repeat sample and call results".
Sample Setup: Run Type = CBC
Preassigned Sample: includes only Hgb and Hct (Report Name)
Sample Results: (As printed and transmitted to LIS.)

Hgb 5.8 g/dL

Hct 17.8 %

PN 624602A 8-21
SETUP
SETTING UP LIS / HIS COMMUNICATIONS

Note: The decision rule will not be applied to this sample even though the Hgb value is
below 6.0. This is because the WBC parameter is not reported. In order for the Decision
Rule to be applied to the sample, all parameters in the rule have to be reported. Therefore
this sample would not result in an Auto Validation failure since the decision rule was not
applied.

IMPORTANT If the Validation Codes are going to be used on either the printout or in the LIS, all parameters
specified in a rule must be included in a parameter block in order for all of the Validation codes to be
CORRECT. Refer to Example B.

Example B:

Rule Setup: Reflex rule is defined as "If Hgb < 6.5 OR Hct < 19.5 then Rerun
Sample and Phone Results”.
Sample Setup: Run Type = CBC
Preassigned Sample: Report all CBC parameters (Report Name),
Sample Results: (As printed and transmitted to LIS.)

WBC 4.8 103/L

RBC 2.53 106/L

Hgb 6.3 g/dL

Hct 19.6 %

MCV 77.4 fL

MCH 24.9 pg

MCHC 32.1 g/dL

RDW 16.1 %

Plt 80 103/L

MPV 10.3 fL
The parameter blocks that will be evaluated against the Decision Rule are the H and C
blocks, because both Hgb and Hct are included in these blocks. The Decision Rule is not
applied to the W block because Hct is not included in this block. Therefore, the Auto
Validation message/codes will print and transmit "Sample Not Validated, C NV, H NV, W
AV”. In order for the Decision Rule to be applied to the W block, you must create a
Decision rule for Hgb and then a Decision rule for Hct, in order to get "Sample Not
Validated, C NV, H NV, W NV”.

8-22 PN 624602A
 SETUP
CHANGING AN INSTRUMENT NAME 8
Enable Auto Validation Codes
Enable the Auto Validation codes on the Communications screen if you want the validation
codes to be transmitted to your information system. These codes will always print on the
patient reports, even if disabled on this screen. To enable transmission of the validation codes:

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the System Setup Communications window.

3. Select the tab.

4. Select Enable Validation Codes.

5. Select to save the changes.

8.16 CHANGING AN INSTRUMENT NAME

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as a Lab
Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory administrator.

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the Communications window.

3. Select to display the settings for the instruments attached to your

Workstation.
4. Type the in-lab name you want used for the instrument.
5. Select:

To close the Communications Setup window and return to the System

Setup window.

Another tab To review or change additional Communications Setup information.

The Workstation asks you if you want to save the changes you made to

the instrument name. Select to proceed.

PN 624602A 8-23
SETUP
REVIEWING WORKSTATION SETTINGS

8.17 REVIEWING WORKSTATION SETTINGS

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as a Lab
Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory administrator.

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the Communications window.

3. Select to display the settings for the instruments attached to your

Workstation.
4. You can change the in-lab name for the instrument. You cannot change any other fields
on this window. To change additional information on this window, contact your
Beckman Coulter Representative.

5. Select to display the settings for the Workstation.

6. Select:

To close the Communications Setup window and return to the System

Setup window. The Workstation immediately updates the instrument
name on all windows and reports.
Another tab To change additional Communications Setup information.

8.18 SETTING UP USER ACCESS LEVELS

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the User Configuration window.

3. Select the type of access you want to grant the person.

4. Type a user name to identify the person you want to grant access and press .

5. Type a password for the user name you want to grant access and press .
6. Type the same password you just typed for verification.

8-24 PN 624602A
 SETUP
SETTING UP USER ACCESS LEVELS 8

7. Select Select to save the current user name and clear the fields so you can add
another user name.

8. Select to close the window.

Changing a User's Access Level

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the User Configuration window.

3. Select the user name you want to change.
4. Select the new type of access.

5. Select .

6. Select to save the changes and close the window.

Changing Your Password

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the Change Password window.

3. Type your current password and press .

4. Type your new password and press .

5. Type your new password a second time for verification.

6. Select to save the new password and close the window.

If you want a blank password, perform the procedure above except,

PN 624602A 8-25
SETUP
SETTING UP USER ACCESS LEVELS

r Step 4, type your new password then use the backspace key to erase the password

and press
r Step 5, type your new password a second time then use the backspace key to erase
the password.

After you select to save the new password and close the window, you will be able to
log on without using a password.

Resetting a Password
To reset a password, an administrator must delete the user name and then create a new user
name with the same name.

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the User Configuration window.

3. Select the user name you want to reset.

4. Select to delete the user name.

5. Select to confirm the deletion.

6. Select the type of access the user name you just deleted was assigned.

7. Type the user name you just deleted and press .

8. Type a password for the user name and press .

9. Type the same password you just typed for verification.

10. Select to save the current user name and clear the fields so you can add another
user name.

11. Select to close the window.

8-26 PN 624602A
 SETUP
CHANGE PHYSICIAN LIST 8
8.19 CHANGE PHYSICIAN LIST

Select to edit the Physician List. You can add, delete, or edit names that appear in the
Physician List.

When you change the Physician List, the changes are available to all operators that use the
Workstation.

8.20 CHANGE LOCATION LIST

Select to edit the Location List. You can add, delete, or edit names that appear in the
Location List.

When you change the Location List, the changes are available to all operators that use the
Workstation.

8.21 SETTING UP DATABASE STORAGE LIMITS

Note: Maintaining a large number of sample results can degrade Workstation performance
when searching for results. To optimize searching, reduce the number of samples stored in the
database.

1. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the DataBase Configuration window.

3. Type the maximum number of samples you want stored in the database.
4. For Automatic ToDo List Deletion:

5. Enable the Delete To Do list entries checkbox.

6. Specify the ToDo list entries to be deleted after 'x' hours. Where 'x' can be within the
range of 00 to 99 hours.

7. Select to save the changes you made to database configuration.

Setting Up Screen Saver

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as an Advanced
Operator or Lab Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory
administrator.

1. Select to display the System Setup window.

PN 624602A 8-27
SETUP
SETTING UP DATABASE STORAGE LIMITS

2. Select to display the Windows® 2000 Control Panel.

3. Double-click to view the display properties window.

4. Select and specify the details for your screen saver.

5. If you need additional information about the fields on the display properties window,
select

6. Select to exit and save the new settings.

Setting Up Colors
Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as an Advanced
Operator or Lab Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory
administrator.

1. Select to display the System Setup window.

2. Select to display the Windows® 2000 Control Panel.

3. Double-click to view the display properties window.

4. Select and specify the details for your screen saver.

5. If you need additional information about the fields on the display properties window,
select

6. Select to exit and save the new settings.

Setting Up Date and Time

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as an Advanced
Operator or Lab Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory
administrator.

1. Select to display the System Setup window.

8-28 PN 624602A
 SETUP
SETTING UP DATABASE STORAGE LIMITS 8

2. Select to display the Windows® 2000 Control Panel.

3. Double-click to display the Windows 2000 Date/Time window.

4. Specify the details for date and time.
5. Shutdown and restart the Workstation after adjusting clock time.
Note: Service selects workstation regional, date and time settings at installation. Call
Service if you desire modification of a regional setting. Modifications attempted at the
LabAdmin security level may cause incorrect displays of information such as date format
in some applications.
6. Read about LH 500 Series Year 2000 features.

Setting Up Your Default Printer

Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as an Advanced
Operator or Lab Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory
administrator.

1. Select to display the Windows® 2000

Print Manager window.
2. Select the printer you want to use. If the printer you want to use does not appear in this
list, you will need to set up a new printer.
3. Select File Set As Default to make the selected printer your default printer.
4. Select File Close to save the default information and close the Print Manager.

Setting Up a New Printer

Network Printer
Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as an Advanced
Operator or Lab Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory
administrator.

1. Ensure your network cable is connected to your network adapter.

2. Select to display the Windows® 2000

Print Manager window.

3. Double click on and follow the instructions in the Add Printer Wizard
4. Select File Properties and verify the printer properties, paper size, and print
orientation.

PN 624602A 8-29
SETUP
RUN CONFIGURATION WINDOW

5. Select to save the changes. The Workstation prints the next item to the
printer you just selected.

Local Printer
Note: To perform this task, you must log on with a user name that was set up as a Lab
Administrator. If you need to access this function, contact your laboratory administrator.

1. Select to display the Windows 2000

Print Manager window.

2. Double click on and follow the instructions in the Add Printer Wizard.
3. Select File Properties and verify the printer properties, paper size, and print
orientation.

4. Select to save the changes. The Workstation prints the next item to the
printer you just selected.

8.22 RUN CONFIGURATION WINDOW

This window allows you to quickly change standard options for individual tests or studies
you may perform.

Changes to this window take effect the next time the Workstation receives a sample. The
changes remain in effect until you or another user change the options again.

You can change:

r Which results to print

r Which default report you want to use
r Which results to transmit to your information system
r Whether results are stored as part of quality assurance information
r Which results should cause the instrument to stop processing
r Whether the Decision Criteria Rules are used
r Whether the AutoNumbering option is used
r Whether the AutoCollation option is used.
r Whether to Match the Run Type to the ToDo list
r Whether to enable limit-independent flags H&H Check Failed and Pancytopenia.
No Match, No Read and Partial Aspiration are not flags, but Run Status messages. As a
selectable item within Run Configuration, these Run Status messages are not included in ‘Any
Flags’. If you wish to implement a function based on all flags and the Run Status message,
select Specific Flags, then select all the pertinent checkboxes.

8-30 PN 624602A
 SETUP
RUN CONFIGURATION WINDOW 8
Research flags are included in ‘Any Flags’, but are not included in ‘Suspect’. If you wish to
implement a function based on all Suspect flags, including the Research flags, select Specific
Flags, then select all the pertinent checkboxes.

Note: Once the default lot number has been selected, close the Run Configuration window by

pressing to save your changes or to exit without saving.

Changing Your Default Printout Format

1. Select on the Command Center to display the Run Configuration window.

2. Specify the print profile you want used for all results unless otherwise specified as part of
the sample result information. The report layout changes automatically.

3. Select to save the changes. The next item that prints from the Workstation prints
using the report you selected.

Changing Your Default Report Layout

Since the report layout is linked to the report name, you can change the default report format
by changing the default printout format. You can also use the following procedure to change
the report layout linked to the default report.

1. Select on the Command Center to display the Run Configuration window.

2. Note the print profile name identified on the window. This is the default report.

3. Select to close the window.

4. Select on the Command Center to display the System Setup window.

5. Select to display the Patient Setup window.

6. Select to display the reported parameters and print options for each
report defined for your Workstation.
7. Select the report number used as the default.
8. Specify a different report layout.

PN 624602A 8-31
SETUP
RUN CONFIGURATION WINDOW

9. Select to save the changes. The next item that prints from the Workstation prints
using the report you selected.

Setting Up Which Results to Print Automatically

1. Select to display the Run Configuration window.

2. Select as the type of Automatic Output.

3. Select the flag type you want to use to determine printing.
4. Select the QA Sample runs that you want to automatically print.

5. Select to save the changes. The next item prints based on the flags you selected.

Setting Up Which Results to Transmit Automatically

1. Select to display the Run Configuration window.

2. Select as the type of Automatic Output.

3. Select the flag type you want to use to determine which results are sent to the
information system.

4. Select to save the changes.

Turning AutoStop OFF/ON

Note: AutoStop is disabled whenever someone logs off the Workstation. Someone must be
logged onto the Workstation to enable AutoStop when the system is processing samples

1. Check that your controls and XB analysis are set up with the AutoStop options you want.

2. Select to display the Run Configuration window.

3. Select the AutoStop options you want:

8-32 PN 624602A
 SETUP
RUN CONFIGURATION WINDOW 8

4. Select to save the changes. The Workstation stops processing samples the next
time it encounters the conditions you selected.
Note: AutoStop does not function when you log off the Workstation.

Turning Decision Criteria OFF/ON

1. Select to display the Run Configuration window.

2. Select Decision Criteria to change the option.

3. Select to save the changes. The Workstation uses the customer rules based on the
selection you made. You must reset this option on this window to change the customer
rules option back to its original state.

Turning AutoNumbering OFF/ON

1. Select to display the Run Configuration window.

2. Select AutoNumbering to change the option.
3. If necessary, type the first number you want used.

4. Select to save the changes. The Workstation performs AutoNumbering based on

the selection you made. The number appears in the sequence number field for the
sample. You must reset this option on this window to change the AutoNumbering option
back to its original state.

Turning AutoCollation OFF/ON

1. Select to display the Run Configuration window.

2. Select AutoCollation to change option.
3. If necessary, specify the time limit you want used.

PN 624602A 8-33
SETUP
RUN CONFIGURATION WINDOW

4. Select to save the changes. The Workstation performs AutoCollation based on

your selection. You must reset this option on this window to change AutoCollation back
to its original state.

Turning XB Analysis OFF/ON

1. Select to display the Run Configuration window.

2. Select the type of quality assurance analysis that you want to change:
r XB

3. Select to save the changes. The Workstation includes the next results in quality
assurance analysis based on the selections you made. You must reset this option on this
window to change quality assurance analysis back to its original state.

Specifying Default Control Lot Numbers

1. Select to display the Run Configuration window.

2. Select the default lot number.
Note: Once the default lot number has been selected, close the Run Configuration

window by pressing to save your changes or to exit without saving.

Changing the Active Printer

1. Select to display the Windows® 2000

Print Manager window.
2. Select the printer you want to use. If the printer you want to use does not appear in this
list, you will need to set up a new printer.
3. Select File Properties and verify the printer properties, paper size, and print
orientation.

4. Select to save the changes. The Workstation prints the next item to the
printer you just selected.

8-34 PN 624602A
 9TROUBLESHOOTING 9
9.1 HAZARDS
Laser Safety Precautions
The LH 500 Hematology Analyzer uses two lasers:

r A laser bar-code reader

r A helium neon laser in the diff module (TTM) for analyzing the WBC differential and
Retic counts.

WARNING The laser in the diff module (TTM) can damage both the instrument and your eyes if you do not
use it safely. Follow the instructions and procedures in this manual to safely use the instrument and prevent
damage.

In its design and manufacture of the LH 500 Hematology Analyzer, Beckman Coulter has
complied with the requirements governing the use and application of a laser as stipulated in
regulatory documents issued by the:

r U.S. Department of Health and Human Services

r Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH).
In compliance with these regulatory documents, every measure has been taken to ensure the
health and safety of users and laboratory personnel from the possible dangers of laser use.

General Laser Safety Warnings

WARNING Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Do not attempt to remove the laser or to open it. If removal is required, it must be done only
by your Beckman Coulter Representative.

To ensure your safety, LH 500 Hematology Analyzer lasers are covered with protective shields
held in place by tamper-proof screws. Do not attempt to remove these shields.

This instrument contains components dangerous to the operator. If any attempt has been
made to defeat a safety feature, or if this instrument fails to perform as listed in this manual,
disconnect power and call your Beckman Coulter Representative.

Warning Labels
CDRH-approved labels are placed near or on those covers that, when removed, might expose
one to laser radiation.

Note: As installed in the Triple Transducer Module (TTM) safety fixture, the laser presents no
radiation hazard to users and complies with 21 CFR 1040.

See Figure_5.1, Figure_5.2, Figure_5.3, and Figure_5.4.

PN 624602A 9-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
HAZARDS

Figure 9.1 Laser Safety Label

9-2 PN 624602A
 TROUBLESHOOTING
HAZARDS 9
Figure 9.2 Safety Labels on the TTM

Figure 9.3 Laser Safety Labels for Bar-Code Reader on the LH 500 Hematology Analyzer

PN 624602A 9-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
DRAINAGE AND WASTE DISPOSAL

Figure 9.4 Laser Safety Labels for LH 500 Power Sources

When you see , consider the following safety warnings:

WARNING To avoid personal injury due to electric shock:

1. Prior to operating insturment, ensure all panels/covers are in place; see Special Notices to Operators.
2. Allow only qualified service personnel to open panels unless otherwise instructed.
3. When replacing fuses:
r Always disconnect the power cord prior to removing/replacing the fuse.
r Always replace a fuse with the same rating as the one removed.

9.2 DRAINAGE AND WASTE DISPOSAL

Drainage

CAUTION Incomplete drainage and overflow into the vacuum system can occur if the waste line is longer
than the recommended length. Contact your Beckman Coulter Representative if you need to increase the
length of the waste line supplied with the system.

WARNING Risk of personal injury if the waste line is twisted, kinked, or knotted. Ensure that waste can
flow freely through the line to prevent a biohazardous condition from waste backup.

The maximum waste line length is 3.7 m (12 ft).

9-4 PN 624602A
 TROUBLESHOOTING
CALIBRATION OVERVIEW 9
WARNING Biohazardous contamination can occur from contact with the waste container and its
associated tubing if not handled with care. Avoid skin contact. Clean up spills immediately. Dispose of the
contents of the waste container in accordance with local environmental regulations and with acceptable
laboratory procedures.

The waste line supplied with the instrument can be connected to either:

r A drain less than 76 cm (30 in.) above the floor.

r A waste container with a recommended minimum capacity of 20 L (5_gal.).
If you use an open drain, mechanically secure the waste tube into the drain so the tube cannot
accidentally come out of the drain. This prevents spillage.

9.3 CALIBRATION OVERVIEW

Calibration fine-tunes the LH 500 Series System so it provides the most accurate results
possible.

Your laboratory is responsible for the final calibration of the CBC parameters and for
recording the calibration factors. Beckman Coulter recommends S-CAL® calibrator, or an
exact equivalent, as an acceptable alternative to whole-blood calibration.

In the normal process of tracking data for an extended period of time, your laboratory can
make a specific decision to recalibrate a given parameter. Never adjust to a specific value for
an individual sample.

For best performance, calibrate all the CBC parameters. The WBC differential and Retic
parameters are calibrated at the factory; they do not require calibration in the laboratory.

When to Calibrate
You should calibrate your instrument:

r At installation
r After the replacement of any component that involves dilution characteristics (such as
the BSV) or the primary measurements (such as the apertures)
r When advised to do so by your Beckman Coulter Representative.
You should verify the calibration of your instrument:

r As dictated by your laboratory procedures, local or national regulations

r When controls begin to show evidence of unusual trends
r When controls exceed the manufacturer's defined acceptable limits.
r If the average ambient room temperature changes more than 10°F from the calibrating
temperature.

9.4 TROUBLESHOOTING OVERVIEW

Data Review
A review of instrument data, such as background, control and blood sample results, is helpful
in detecting problems. Sometimes a questionable blood sample result is the only symptom of

PN 624602A 9-5
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING OVERVIEW

subtle reagent or pneumatic problems. In that case, you can use the questionable parameter
result as a clue to the location of the malfunction.

Specimen-Related Problems
An instrument problem is differentiated from a specimen-related problem by running a
control. If the control results are acceptable, the problem is probably specimen-related.

Instrument Problems
If the control results show similar problems, it indicates an instrument problem. The next
step is to determine the subsystem (electronic, pneumatic/hydraulic, or reagent) causing the
problem. Because it is easiest to detect a problem in the electronic subsystem and hardest to
detect a problem in the reagent subsystem, the subsystems are usually checked in the
following order: electronic, pneumatic/hydraulic, reagent.

Workstation Troubleshooting
If the Workstation encounters a problem, it tries to display a message. The message describes
the problem and provides information about how to avoid or fix the problem. For best results,
follow the instructions with the messages.

Some messages appear from the Windows® 2000 operating system and other software
packages that are included on your Workstation. Because these messages may not be logged
by the Workstation and may not have online help available for them, it is important that you
write these down and call your Beckman Coulter Representative.

If your Workstation is connected to a network, some messages may be caused by your

network configuration. If you have a local network administrator or a Windows 2000
Administrator, contact your administrator prior to calling your Beckman Coulter
Representative. Your administrator may be able to resolve the problem.

Note: During the course of testing the Workstation, specific intermittent problems have been
reported and corrective actions have been determined. You may want to review the Problem
List periodically to help avoid these problems.

Electronic Troubleshooting
Detecting a problem in the electronic subsystem--or eliminating the electronic subsystem as
the source of the problem--is simplified by indicators and electronic tests.

Indicators
An indicator may inform you that a problem exists; it may also pinpoint the source of a
problem. For example, a voltage message may indicate a problem with a fuse.

Correcting Electronic Problems

Although you may be able to correct minor problems, such as loose cables, most electronic
problems require the assistance of your Beckman Coulter Representative.

Pneumatic/Hydraulic Troubleshooting
Most pneumatic/hydraulic problems are detected by observing the Diluter section in
operation. When you identify a symptom of a malfunction, try to isolate the malfunction to

9-6 PN 624602A
 TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING OVERVIEW 9
the specific part of the cycle, for example, during preparation, counting, or cleanup. Then, try
to isolate the malfunction to the specific components and tubing. Next, look for one of four
possible problems--pinched tubing, plugs, leaks, or defective components.

Pinched Tubing
When tubing is pinched, flow is either restricted or stopped. Tubing most often pinches
where it passes through, between, or around something, or where it attaches to a fitting.
Examples: tubing passing through a pinch valve, around a panel, or between two hard
objects.

Plug
A plug, like a pinch, restricts or stops a flow. A plug can be composed of liquid, salt, or debris.
This type of problem may be hard to find because it often occurs inside other components. A
plug can occur in tubing, in a fitting, at an aperture, or in a choke.

Plugs are most common in vacuum lines and waste paths that involve the use of fluids and
air.

Leak
A leak allows fluid to escape before reaching its destination. If there is a leak in a pneumatic
line, the pneumatic signal may fail to operate a component, such as a pinch valve, pump, or
diluent dispenser. A leak generally occurs where one component attaches to another, such as
where tubing attaches to a fitting, a housing, a pilot actuator, a pump, or the Blood Sampling
Valve. Leaks can also be the result of cracks in components, such as pumps or glassware.

Defective Components
The interrelationship of components performing a pneumatic/hydraulic process can make it
difficult to determine which component, if any, is defective. For example, if a pinch valve
does not open, it is possible the pinch valve is defective. But it is also possible that the
solenoid responsible for activating the pinch valve is defective.

Correcting Pneumatic/Hydraulic Problems

You can correct most pneumatic/hydraulic problems, including defective components.

Reagent Troubleshooting
A reagent problem can be as obvious as precipitate in the reagent tubing. In the less obvious
cases, the most effective way of detecting a problem is by keeping a log of the lot numbers
with the opening and expiration dates of the reagents in use, and knowing how each reagent
affects the data. Refer to the labeling information with your reagents for details.

Correcting Reagent Problems

You can correct most reagent problems by changing the container of reagent and priming the
instrument with the new reagent.

PN 624602A 9-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
CLEAR FLOW CELL CLOG

9.5 CLEAR FLOW CELL CLOG

The first step in troubleshooting diff problems is to run latron. If latron results are good, the
flow cell is not clogged. The cause of the incorrect diff results could be chemistry related: diff
reagent delivery rate or volume is incorrect.

Error Messages:

PC1 - Partial Clog 1

This indicates partial aperture (flow cell) and sample line clogs. A purge cycle occurs at the
end of the cycle if PC1 is detected. Five-part diff results are not displayed. At the end of the
third consecutive PC1, PC2 or FC error, the system halts.

PC2 - Partial Clog 2

This indicates clogs in the sheath system. A purge cycle occurs automatically when PC2 is
detected. Five-part diff results are not displayed. At the end of the third consecutive PC1, PC2
or FC error, the system halts.

FC - Full Clog
This indicates a flow cell aperture clog only. A purge cycle automatically occurs when FC is
detected. Five-part diff results are not displayed. At the end of the third consecutive PC1, PC2
or FC error, the system halts.

Clearing Procedure:
Note: This procedure requires that the Instrument interface is displayed.

Follow these steps to manually unclog the flow cell aperture.

1. Select Diluter Functions Purge.

a. Press . Wait. Press again. Wait. Press again. Wait.

2. On the Command Center, select AUTOANALYSIS as the process type, CD as the run
type, and MANUAL as the aspiration mode.
a. Cycle a normal whole blood sample in the Automatic mode. If the error message
recurs, proceed to step 3.
3. On the Command Center, select CONTROL as the process type.
a. Prepare a solution of one part high-quality, fragrance-free bleach (5 to 6% sodium
hypochlorite -- available chlorine) and one part distilled water.

b. Press .

9-8 PN 624602A
 TROUBLESHOOTING
CLEAR FLOW CELL CLOG 9
c. Aspirate the solution at the manual aspiration probe by pushing the sample bar.
Remove solution container when the System Status Box displays DILUTING and the
beep sounds.
d. Aspirate distilled water in the same manner.
e. Perform Disinfect procedure.
4. On the Command Center, select AUTOANALYSIS as the process type.
5. Cycle a normal whole blood sample in the Automatic mode. If the error message recurs,
call your Beckman Coulter Representative.

PN 624602A 9-9
TROUBLESHOOTING
CLEAR FLOW CELL CLOG

9-10 PN 624602A
 TROUBLESHOOTING
9

9.6 INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES

Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
-15 VDC OUT OF RANGE ERROR PERFORM Yes If error occurred before -15 VDC OUT OF RANGE Data is invalid; dots (....) Stopped -15 Vdc instrument 1. If the voltage reading is 0.00, replace fuse F4.
[XX.XX] SYSTEM TEST data acquisition, data is [XX.XX] appear in all parameter voltage out of range. Refer to the Online Help topic: Replace Fuses.
Note: XX.XX = actual not available. Note: XX.XX = actual fields. Range is -15.75 to 2. If the voltage is >0.00:
reading If error occurred after reading -14.25 Vdc.
a. Perform a System Test to confirm the reading.
data acquisition, data is Refer to the Online Help topic: System Test.
invalid.
b. Notify your Beckman Coulter Representative.
+12 VDC OUT OF RANGE ERROR PERFORM Yes If error occurred before +12 Vdc OUT OF RANGE Data is invalid; dots (....) Stopped. +12 Vdc instrument 1. If the voltage reading is 0.00, replace fuse F6.
[XX.XX] SYSTEM TEST data acquisition, data is [XX.XX] appear in all parameter voltage out of range. Refer to the Online Help topic: Replace Fuses.
Note: XX.XX = actual not available. Note: XX.XX = actual fields. Range is +11.40 to 2. If the voltage is >0.00:
reading If error occurred after reading +12.60 Vdc.
a. Perform a System Test to confirm the reading.
data acquisition, data is Refer to the Online Help topic: System Test.
invalid. b. Notify your Beckman Coulter Representative.
+1350 VDC OUT OF RANGE ERROR PERFORM Yes If error occurred before +1350 Vdc OUT OF RANGE Data is invalid; dots (....) Stopped. +1350 Vdc instrument 1. If the voltage reading is 0, open the right side door
[XX.XX] SYSTEM TEST data acquisition, data is [XX.XX] appear in all parameter voltage out of range. and check the red LED on the TTM laser cover.
Note: XX.XX = actual not available. Note: XX.XX = actual fields. Range is +1186 to r If the LED is on, replace fuse F9. Refer to the
reading If error occurred after reading +1523 Vdc. Online Help topic: Replace Fuses.
data acquisition, data is r If the LED is off, press down on the cover. If the
invalid. LED is still off, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
2. If the reading is >1523 Vdc, call your Beckman
Coulter Representative.
+15 VDC OUT OF RANGE ERROR PERFORM Yes If error occurred before +15 Vdc OUT OF RANGE Data is displayed if Stopped. +15 Vdc instrument 1. If the voltage reading is 0.00, replace fuse F4.
[XX.XX] SYSTEM TEST data acquisition, data is [XX.XX] available. voltage out of range. Refer to the Online Help topic: Replace Fuses.
Note: XX.XX = actual not available. Note: XX.XX = actual Range is +14.25 to 2. If the voltage is >0.00:
reading If error occurred after reading +15.75 Vdc.
a. Perform a System Test to confirm the reading.
data acquisition, data is Refer to the Online Help topic: System Test.
invalid. b. Notify your Beckman Coulter Representative.
+24 VDC OUT OF RANGE ERROR PERFORM Yes If error occurred before +24 Vdc OUT OF RANGE Data is invalid; dots (....) Stopped +24 Vdc instrument 1. If the voltage reading is 0.00, replace fuse F5.
[XX.XX] SYSTEM TEST data acquisition, data is [XX.XX] appear in all parameter voltage out of range. Refer to the Online Help topic: Replace Fuses.
Note: XX.XX = actual not available. Note: XX.XX = actual fields. Range is +22.80 to 2. If the voltage is >0.00:
reading If error occurred after reading +25.20 Vdc.
a. Perform a System Test to confirm the reading.
data acquisition, data is Refer to the Online Help topic: System Test.
invalid.
b. Notify your Beckman Coulter Representative.

PN 624602A 9-11
TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES

Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
+240 VDC OUT OF RANGE ERROR PERFORM Yes If error occurred before +240 Vdc OUT OF RANGE Data is invalid; dots (....) Stopped. +240 Vdc instrument 1. If the voltage reading is 0.00, replace fuse F7.
[XX.XX] SYSTEM TEST data acquisition, data is [XX.XX] appear in all parameter voltage out of range. Refer to the Online Help topic: Replace Fuses.
Note: XX.XX = actual not available. Note: XX.XX = actual fields. Range is +228.0 to 2. If the voltage is >0.00:
reading If error occurred after reading +265.0 Vdc.
a. Perform a System Test to confirm the reading.
data acquisition, data is Refer to the Online Help topic: System Test.
invalid. b. Notify your Beckman Coulter Representative.
+300 VDC OUT OF RANGE ERROR PERFORM Yes If error occurred before +300 Vdc OUT OF RANGE Data is invalid; dots (....) Stopped. +300 Vdc instrument 1. If the voltage reading is 0.00, replace fuse F8.
[XX.XX] SYSTEM TEST data acquisition, data is [XX.XX] appear in all parameter voltage out of range. Refer to the Online Help topic: Replace Fuses.
Note: XX.XX = actual not available. Note: XX.XX = actual fields. Range is +285 to 2. If the voltage is >0.00:
reading If error occurred after reading +315 Vdc.
a. Perform a System Test to confirm the reading.
data acquisition, data is Refer to the Online Help topic: System Test.
invalid.
b. Notify your Beckman Coulter Representative.
+5 VDC OUT OF RANGE ERROR PERFORM Yes If error occurred before +5 Vdc OUT OF RANGE Data is invalid; dots (....) Stopped. +5 Vdc instrument voltage 1. If the voltage reading is 0.00, replace fuse F4.
[XX.XX] SYSTEM TEST data acquisition, data is [XX.XX] appear in all parameter out of range. Range is Refer to the Online Help topic: Replace Fuses.
Note: XX.XX = actual not available. Note: XX.XX = actual fields. +4.75 to +5.25 Vdc. 2. If the voltage is >0.00:
reading If error occurred after reading a. Perform a System Test to confirm the reading.
data acquisition, data is Refer to the Online Help topic: System Test.
invalid.
b. Notify your Beckman Coulter Representative.
+6.3 VDC OUT OF RANGE ERROR PERFORM Yes If error occurred before +6.3 Vdc OUT OF RANGE Data is invalid; dots (....) Stopped. +6.3 Vdc instrument 1. If the voltage reading is 0.00, replace fuse F8.
[XX.XX] SYSTEM TEST data acquisition, data is [XX.XX] appear in all parameter voltage out of range. Refer to the Online Help topic: Replace Fuses.
Note: XX.XX = actual not available. Note: XX.XX = actual fields. Range is +5.98 to 2. If the voltage is >0.00:
reading If error occurred after reading +6.62 Vdc.
a. Perform a System Test to confirm the reading.
data acquisition, data is Refer to the Online Help topic: System Test.
invalid.
b. Notify your Beckman Coulter Representative.
3 CONSECUTIVE FLOW ERROR PURGE THE Yes Data is available 3 CONSECUTIVE FLOW No data displayed for Stopped Three consecutive flow 1. Clear the flow cell clog. Refer to the Online Help
CLOGS FLOWCELL CLOGS the specimen. Data for cell clogs (any topic: Clear Flow Cell Clog.
previous specimen is combination of FC, PC1 2. Run a Startup.
still available. and PC2) occurred.
3. If results are good verify LATRON control
recovery.
4. If recovery is good continue processing.

9-12 9-12 PN 624602A

 TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES 9
Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
3 CONSECUTIVE PARTIAL ERROR CHECK / CLEAN Yes Data is available 3 CONSECUTIVE PARTIAL “P” appears next to all Stopped. Three consecutive 1. Run a sample in the Manual mode to see if it
ASPIRATIONS THE NEEDLE ASPIRATIONS parameter fields. attempts to aspirate were works.
unsuccessful. 2. If the Manual mode mode works:
a. Check the tubing from the needle to the blood
detector for a pinch or a crimp.
b. If the tubing is okay, replace the needle. Refer
to the Online Help topic: Replace Needle
Assembly.
c. Clean the needle using; One part, high quality
fragrance free bleach (5% sodium
hypochlorite), one part, distilled water in a cap
pierce tube.
d. At the Instrument computer, select
Diagnostics, Operator Options, Fluid Tests,
Clean Needle.
e. Press ENTER.
f. Follow the screen instructions.
3. Cycle a whole blood with known results to verify
the needle.
4. To resume operation access the appropriate
screen, reselect the mode of operation and rerun
the specimens. Continue processing.
5. If the error persists call your Beckman Coulter
representative.

3 CONSECUTIVE VOTEOUTS ERROR CHECK / CLEAN Yes Data is available 3 CONSECUTIVE Data for affected Stopped. Three consecutive total 1. Zap the apertures. Refer to the Online Help topic:
THE APERTURES VOTEOUTS parameters is voteouts of a particular Zap Apertures.
incomplete; dashes parameter occurred. 2. If error recurs, check the mixing bubbles.
(----) appear in affected
3. If error recurs, bleach the apertures. Refer to the
parameter fields..
Online Help topic: Bleach Apertures and Flow
Cell/Disinfect.
4. To resume operation access the appropriate
screen, reselect the mode of operation and rerun
the specimens. Continue processing.
30 PSI OUT OF RANGE ERROR CHECK / ADJUST Yes If error occurred before 30 PSI OUT OF RANGE Data is invalid; dots (....) Stopped. Pressure out of 1. Perform a System Test to confirm the pressure
[XX.XX] 30 PSI aspiration was [XX.XX] appear in all parameter established operating reading. Refer to the Online Help topic: System
Note: XX.XX = actual completed, data is not Note: XX.XX = actual fields. range. Range is +26.0 to Test.
reading available. reading +34.0 psi. 2. If the pressure is still out of range, adjust the
If error occurred after 30-psi pressure (RG2). Refer to the Online Help
aspiration was topic: Adjust Pressure and Low Vacuum.
completed, data is
invalid.

PN 624602A 9-13
TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES

Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
A/D FAILURE ERROR RE-ENTER Yes If error occurred before A/D FAILURE Data is invalid; dots (....) Stopped. Analog-to-digital 1. Attempt to perform the requested function again
FUNCTION / aspiration was appear in all parameter converter failed an and rerun the specimen.
RECYCLE completed, data is not fields. interrupt within specified 2. If error recurs, reset the instrument by turning the
SPECIMEN available. time Standby/Reset switch off and then on.
If error occurred after
aspiration was
completed, data is
invalid.
A/D MEASUREMENT ERROR RE-ENTER Yes If error occurred before A/D MEASUREMENT Data is invalid; dots (....) Stopped. Analog-to-digital 1. Attempt to perform the requested function again
ERROR FUNCTION / data acquisition, data is ERROR appear in all parameter converter encountered too and rerun the specimen.
RECYCLE not available. fields. much noise on ground 2. If error recurs, reset the instrument by turning the
SPECIMEN If error occurred after reference. Standby/Reset switch off and then on.
data acquisition, data is
invalid.
ANALYSIS NOT DONE ERROR RESET THE Yes Data is available. ANALYSIS NOT DONE No data displayed for Stopped Instrument error detected Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
SYSTEM the specimen. Data for by CPU while sample switch off and then on.
previous specimen is analysis in progress.
still displayed. System locked up.

ANALYZER POWER ERROR INSTRUMENT PC One N/A N/A N/A - No message is Stopped Instrument detected Note: Any process running on the Instrument
INTERRUPTION WILL RESET Long No message displayed or displayed. Analyzer power failure. Computer ends and the computer resets. The system
logged. Generated if the input resynchronizes and returns to a Ready state.
power drops below To resume operation, reselect the desired function.
88 Vac.
BAD DOWNLOAD MSG ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A BAD DOWNLOAD MSG N/A Stopped Instrument Computer Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
RCVD - 196 CODE SYSTEM RCVD - 196 CODE received bad download switch off and then on.
message while
downloading sample
handler code. System
locked up.
BAD PORT IN USE TO SEND ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A BAD PORT IN USE TO N/A Stopped Data sent to wrong port. Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
DATA SYSTEM SEND DATA System locked up. switch off and then on.

BARCODE READER DID NOT ERROR RESET THE Yes Data is not available. BARCODE READER DID No data displayed for Stopped Barcode scanner not Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
RESPOND SYSTEM NOT RESPOND the specimen. Data for active. Cass/pos and tube switch off and then on.
previous specimen is labels not read System
still displayed. locked up.

BLOOD COMPARISON OUT ERROR REMIX AND Yes Data is available. BLOOD COMPARISON No data displayed for Stopped Instrument unable to 1. Rerun the specimen.
OF LIMITS REPEAT THE OUT OF LIMITS the specimen. Data for detect the presence of 2. If the error recurs, perform a System Test. Refer
SAMPLE previous specimen is blood. to the Online Help topic: System Test.
still displayed.
3. If the System Test is OK, run the specimen again.
4. If the error recurs, run in Manual mode.

9-14 9-14 PN 624602A

 TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES 9
Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
CAL FACTORS NOT WITHIN ERROR CHECK CBC CAL Yes Data is available. CAL FACTORS NOT None N/A Data is displayed. N/A At least one calibration Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
LIMITS FACTORS WITHIN LIMITS factor requested for Service Only: If performing a Secondary calibration;
transmission is not within
limits. 1. Recheck the factors against the primary limits.
2. If the factors are within limits, enter the factors
Note: The secondary
manually.
calibration factors must
all be in the range 0.500 3. If the factors are not within limits:
to 2.000. a. Troubleshoot the out of limits parameters.
b. Correct the problem and re-calibrate.
CANNOT MOVE CASSETTE ERROR CHECK BED Yes If error occurred before CANNOT MOVE CASSETTE Data is displayed if Stopped. Cassette does not move 1. Remove the jammed cassette.
ON BED MECHANISM / aspiration was ON BED available. along the bed; cassette 2. Perform the Autoloader Test Routine:
CASSETTE completed, data is not jammed, indexing
a. Place a cassette in the loading bay.
available. mechanism failed, or
cassette motor faulty. b. Set the Computer Switch to position 1.
If error occurred after
aspiration was c. From the Main menu, select Diagnostics tt
completed, data is Operator Options tt Autoloader Tests tt
available. Autoloader Test Routine.
3. If the test fails, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
CANNOT OPEN RAW DATA ERROR DISK MAY BE Yes Data is available. CANNOT OPEN RAW DATA Data is displayed.. Stopped. System unable to open Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
FILE FULL FILE RAW.DAT file. Space on
hard disk may be
insufficient.

CANNOT ROCK BED ERROR CHECK BED Yes If error occurred before CANNOT ROCK BED Data is displayed if Stopped. Bed does not rock, 1. Manually unload the bed.
MECHANISM aspiration was available.. indexing mechanism 2. Perform the Rock the Bed test:
completed, data is not jammed or rocking motor
a. Set the Computer Switch to position 1.
available. faulty.
b. From the Main menu, select Diagnostics tt
If error occurred after
Operator Options tt Autoloader Tests tt Rock
aspiration was
the Bed and visually check for obvious
completed, data is
obstructions.
available.
3. If the test fails, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
CASSETTE LABEL NO READ ERROR RESTART Yes Data is not available. CASSETTE LABEL NO No data displayed for Stopped. Single NO READ of 1. Try running specimens in an alternate cassette.
POSITION WILL READ the specimen. Data for Cass/pos number 2. If the alternate cassette works, try cleaning the
BE SKIPPED previous specimen is occurred, or cassette not bar-code label on the first cassette and rerunning
still displayed advanced. that cassette.
3. If problem persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.

PN 624602A 9-15
TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES

Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
CASSETTE LOAD FAILURE ERROR CHECK FOR Yes If error occurred before CASSETTE LOAD FAILURE Data is displayed if Stopped Cassette does not load; Remove the jammed cassette.
JAMMED aspiration was available. cassette jammed in
CASSETTE completed, data is not loading bay.
available.
If error occurred after
aspiration was
completed, data is
available.
CASSETTE UNLOAD ERROR CHECK FOR Yes If error occurred before CASSETTE UNLOAD Data is displayed if Stopped Cassette does not unload; Remove the jammed cassette.
FAILURE JAMMED aspiration was FAILURE available. cassette jammed in
CASSETTE completed, data is not unloading bay.
available.
If error occurred after
aspiration was
completed, data is
available.
CBC DATA ACQUISITION ERROR RE-ENTER Yes Data is not available. CBC DATA ACQUISITION Data is invalid, dots (....) Stopped. CBC acquisition could not 1. Attempt to do the requested function again, and
FAILURE FUNCTION / or one FAILURE appear in all parameters. be completed because of rerun the specimen.
RE-CYCLE long pending error. 2. If error recurs, reset the instrument by turning the
SPECIMEN Standby/Reset switch off and then on.
COMMAND COMPLETE NOT ERROR CHECK SYSTEM Yes If error occurred before COMMAND COMPLETE Data is invalid, dots (....) Stopped. The system could not Verify the cables are plugged firmly into tthe correct
SUCCESSFUL CABLES transmission, data is NOT SUCCESSFUL appear in all parameters. complete request from jacks.
not available. Instrument Computer.
If error occurred after
transmission data is
available.
COMMAND TO DIGIBOARD ERROR CHECK SYSTEM Yes If error occurred before COMMAND TO Data is displayed Stopped Digiboard software 1. Reset the instrument by turning the
NOT ACCEPTED CABLES transmission, data is DIGIBOARD NOT detected error and Standby/Reset switch off and then on.
not available. ACCEPTED rejected command from 2. Attempt to do the requested function again.
If error occurred after Instrument Computer.
3. If error recurs, call your Beckman Coulter
transmission data is Representative.
available.
COMPRESSOR DID NOT ERROR CONTACT Yes N/A COMPRESSOR DID NOT N/A Stopped. Compressor bleed 1. If the waste line is routed into a sink/drain, ensure
BLEED [XX.XX] SERVICE BLEED [XX.XX] sequence activated, but the waste line and the drain are not blocked.
Note: XX.XX = actual Note: XX.XX = actual pressure did not drop in 2. If the waste line and drain are open or the waste
reading reading specified time. line does not go into a drain, call your Beckman
Coulter Representative.

9-16 9-16 PN 624602A

 TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES 9
Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
CRC ERROR ON READ ERROR RESET THE Yes If error occurred before CRC ERROR ON READ Data is displayed if Stopped Cyclic redundancy check Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
SYSTEM .CFG.FILE SYSTEM data acquisition, data is SYSTEM .CFG.FILE available. (CRC) error occurred switch off and then on.
not available. while reading
If error occurred after SYSTEM.CFG file. System
data acquisition, data is locked up.
available.
DIFF DATA ACQUISITION ERROR RE-ENTER Yes If error occurred before DIFF DATA ACQUISITION Data is invalid, dots (....) Stopped. Differential data 1. Reset the instrument by turning the
FAILURE FUNCTION / data acquisition, data is FAILURE appear in all parameters. acquisition could not be Standby/Reset switch off and then on.
RE-CYCLE not available. completed because of 2. Rerun the specimen.
SPECIMEN If error occurred after pending error.
data acquisition, data is
available.
DIFF PRESSURE OUT OF ERROR CHECK / ADJUST Yes If error occurred before DIFF PRESSURE OUT OF Data is invalid, dots (....) Stopped. Differential pressure not 1. Perform a System Test to confirm the reading.
RANGE DIFF PRESSURE data acquisition, data is RANGE appear in all parameters. within established Refer to the Online Help topic: System Test.
not available. operating range. 2. If the Diff pressure is still out of range, call your
If error occurred after Range is +0.100 to +1.00 Beckman Coulter Representative.
data acquisition, data is psi.
available.
DILUENT COMPARISON ERROR PRIME DILUENT Yes Data is not available. DILUENT COMPARISON No data displayed for Stopped. Diluent comparison is out 1. Perform a System Test to prime the diluent and
OUT OF LIMITS AND REPEAT THE OUT OF LIMITS the specimen. Data for of limits and could not verify the problem. Refer to the Online Help topic:
SAMPLE previous specimen is detect presence of diluent. System Test.
still displayed 2. Verify that Fr Bl Dtr and Rr Bl Dtr voltages are in
range.
3. If the problem recurs, cycle the Analytical Station
and check that the BSV is rotating completely.
4. If the BSV is not rotating completely:
a. Clean the BSV exterior, focusing on the silver
alignment bar. Refer to the Online Help topic:
Clean Outside of Blood Sampling Valve (BSV).
b. Perform the Cycle BSV test. Refer to the Online
Help topic: Cycle BSV.
c. If the test fails, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
DILUENT OUT ERROR REPLACE Yes Data is not available. DILUENT OUT Data is displayed. Stopped OUT-OF-DILUENT signal 1. Check the level of diluent.
DILUENT UPDATE detected from reagent 2. If reagent container is empty:
FILE PRIME sensor, insufficient diluent
a. Replace the diluent. Refer to the Online topic:
to perform another cycle
Replace Reagent Containers.
b. Update the reagent file.
c. Prime the diluent.
3. If reagent container is not empty, verify reagent
input tubing is connected properly at both ends.

PN 624602A 9-17
TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES

Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
DILUTER TABLE ERROR ERROR RESET THE Yes If error occurred before DILUTER TABLE ERROR Data is displayed if Stopped. During the download, Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
ALARM data acquisition, data is available instrument could not find switch off and then on.
not available. usable diluter table.
If error occurred after
data acquisition, data is
available.
INSTRUMENT PC DRIVE C: ERROR INST. DRIVE C: Yes Data is not available. INSTRUMENT PC DRIVE C: No data displayed for Stopped. Instrument Computer 1. Reset the instrument by turning the
FAILURE COULD NOT BE FAILURE the specimen. Data for Drive C has <1 MB of Standby/Reset switch off and then on.
ACCESSED previous specimen is space left; therefore a new 2. If the problem recurs, call your Beckman Coulter
still displayed file for the queue cannot Representative.
be created in Drive C.
INSTRUMENT PC DRIVE C: ERROR REMOVE DATA Yes Data is not available. INSTRUMENT PC DRIVE C: New data is not Stopped Space on the Instrument Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
FULL FULL displayed Computer Drive C hard
disk is insufficient for the
execution of the request.

DOWNLOAD NOT ERROR CHECK ERROR Yes N/A DOWNLOAD NOT N/A Stopped Errors occurred during 1. Check the error log to determine why the
SUCCESSFUL LOG SUCCESSFUL download of software to download was unsuccessful.
the instrument from 2. Reset the instrument by turning the
Instrument Computer. Standby/Reset switch off and then on.
3. If problem recurs, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
ERROR READING ERROR RESET THE Yes If error occurred before ERROR READING Data is displayed if Stopped SYSTEM.CFG file could Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
SYSTEM.CFG FILE SYSTEM data acquisition, data is SYSTEM.CFG FILE available. not be read. The system switch off and then on.
not available. locked up.
If error occurred after
data acquisition, data is
available.
ERROR UPDATING ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A ERROR UPDATING Data is displayed if Stopped SYSTEM.CFG file could Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
SYSTEM.CFG FILE SYSTEM SYSTEM.CFG FILE available. not be updated. The switch off and then on.
system locked up.

FILE I/O ERROR ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A FILE I/O ERROR N/A Stopped File input/output error Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
SYSTEM occurred. The system switch off and then on.
locked up.

HGB OUT OF RANGE ERROR PERFORM Yes Data is not available. HGB OUT OF RANGE No data displayed for Stopped Hemoglobin lamp voltage 1. Perform a System Test to confirm the reading.
SYSTEM TEST the specimen. Data for is not within established Refer to the Online Help topic: System Test.
previous specimen is operating range. 2. If the HGB is still out of range:
still displayed. Range is a. Ensure the WBC bath contains diluent.
6.65 to 7.35 V.
b. Adjust the HGB lamp.
c. Check the HGB lamp and replace it if necessary.

9-18 9-18 PN 624602A

 TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES 9
Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
HIGH VACUUM OUT OF ERROR CHECK / ADJUST Yes If error occurred before HIGH VACUUM OUT OF Data is displayed if Stopped High vacuum is not within 1. Verify that the:
RANGE HIGH VACUUM data acquisition, data is RANGE available. established operating a. Vacuum trap is not full of liquid.
not available. range.
b. Float is not stuck in the up position.
If error occurred after Range is 13.00 to c. Bowl is screwed on tight.
data acquisition, data is 28.00 in. of Hg (at sea
available. level) V. 2. Check for obviously split or disconnected tubing.
3. Perform a System Test to confirm the reading.
Refer to the Online Help topic: System Test.
4. If the high vacuum is still out of range, call your
Beckman Coulter Representative.
ID CANCELLED TIME ERROR REENTER One Data is not available. ID CANCELLED TIME No data displayed for N/A Sample ID number Re-enter the Sample ID number and process the
EXPIRED PATIENT ID Long EXPIRED the specimen. Data entered was cancelled specimen.
displayed for the because time to respond
previous specimen is to Cancel prompt expired.
still displayed.
ILLEGAL INSTRUMENT ERROR RESET THE Yes Data is not available. ILLEGAL INSTRUMENT No data displayed for Stopped Illegal reply received from Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
REPLY SYSTEM REPLY the specimen. Data instrument. The system switch off and then on.
displayed for the locked up.
previous specimen is
still displayed.
INCOMPLETE SAMPLE ERROR None Yes N/A INCOMPLETE SAMPLE N/A Stopped Instrument detected that 1. Reset the instrument by turning the
HANDLER SOFTWARE HANDLER SOFTWARE downloaded software is Standby/Reset switch off and then on.
incompatible with sample 2. Verify the Stop switch is not stuck.
handler hardware. The
3. If problem recurs, call your Beckman Coulter
system locked up.
Representative.
INCOMPLETE NEEDLE ERROR REFER TO HELP Yes Data is not available. INCOMPLETE NEEDLE No data displayed for Stopped Needle did not completely Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
PIERCE PIERCE the specimen. Data pierce tube.
displayed for the
previous specimen is
still displayed.
INCOMPLETE NEEDLE ERROR REFER TO HELP Yes Data is not available. INCOMPLETE NEEDLE No data displayed for Stopped Needle did not fully retract Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
RETRACT RETRACT the specimen. Data after piercing tube, needle
displayed for the jammed or sensor failed.
previous specimen is
still displayed.
INCOMPLETE RAW DATA ERROR RESET THE Yes Data is available, raw INCOMPLETE RAW DATA Data is displayed. Stopped Raw data could not be Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM data is not available. TRANSMISSION completely transmitted switch off and then on.
because the size of the
RAW.DAT file is
inadequate. The system
locked up

PN 624602A 9-19
TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES

Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message
INCOMPLETE TUBE
FORWARD
INCOMPLETE TUBE
RETRACT
INSTRUMENT
CONFIGURATION ERROR
INSTRUMENT INTERNAL
ERROR XXX
Note: XXX = actual internal
code number
INSTRUMENT REPLY
TIMEOUT
INSTRUMENT TO 196 CODE
DWNLD FAILED
INVALID 376 MOD/CMD
RCVD 196 CFG DLD
Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
ERROR CHECK FOR A Yes Data is not available. INCOMPLETE TUBE Data is not displayed. Stopped Tube did not move 1. Remove the jammed tube.
JAMMED TUBE FORWARD completely forward, tube 2. If problem recurs, optical sensor requires
jammed. cleaning. Call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
ERROR CHECK FOR A Yes If error occurred before INCOMPLETE TUBE Data is displayed if Stopped Tube did not return to 1. Remove the jammed tube.
JAMMED TUBE aspiration was RETRACT available.. cassette from piercing 2. If problem recurs, optical sensor requires
completed, data is not position, tube jammed. cleaning. Call your Beckman Coulter
available. Representative.
If error occurred after
aspiration was
completed, data is
available.
ERROR RESET THE Yes If error occurred before INSTRUMENT Data is displayed.if Stopped Error detected in Random Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
SYSTEM aspiration was CONFIGURATION ERROR available. Access Memory (RAM). switch off and then on.
completed, data is not The system locked up.
available.
If error occurred after
aspiration was
completed, data is
available.
ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A INSTRUMENT INTERNAL N/A Stopped Internal instrument error Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
SYSTEM ERROR XXX detected by CPU. The switch off and then on.
Note: XXX = actual internal system locked up.
code number
ERROR RESET THE Yes If error occurred before INSTRUMENT REPLY Data is displayed.if Stopped Time expired while 1. Ensure the needle shield is installed properly.
SYSTEM transmission was TIMEOUT available. watiing for reply from 2. Reset the instrument by turning the
completed, data is not instrument. The system Standby/Reset switch off and then on.
available. locked up.
If error occurred after
transmission was
completed, data is
available.
ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A INSTRUMENT TO 196 N/A Stopped Sample handler code 1. Ensure the needle shield is installed properly.
SYSTEM CODE DWNLD FAILED download failed from 2. Verify that Stop switch is not stuck.
instrument to sample
3. Reset the instrument by turning the
handler. The system
Standby/Reset switch off and then on.
locked up.
ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A INVALID 376 MOD/CMD N/A Stopped During sample handler 1. Ensure the needle shield is installed properly.
SYSTEM RCVD 196 CFG DLD configuration download, 2. Verify that Stop switch is not stuck.
Instrument Computer
3. Reset the instrument by turning the
received response from
Standby/Reset switch off and then on.
instrument with incorrect
destination.

9-20 9-20 PN 624602A

 TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES 9
Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
INVALID 376 MOD/CMD ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A INVALID 376 MOD/CMD N/A Stopped During sample handler Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
RCVD 196 DWNLD SYSTEM RCVD 196 DWNLD download, Instrument switch off and then on.
Computer received
response from instrument
with incorrect destination.
INVALID MOD/CMD IN DLTR ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A INVALID MOD/CMD IN N/A Stopped During diluter download, Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
DWNLD SYSTEM DLTR DWNLD Instrument Computer switch off and then on.
received response from
instrument with incorrect
destination.
INVALID MOD/CMD RCVD ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A INVALID MOD/CMD RCVD N/A Stopped During instrument Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
376 CFG DWNLD SYSTEM 376 CFG DWNLD processor configuration switch off and then on.
download, Instrument
Computer received
response from instrument
with incorrect destination.
INVALID MOD/CMD RCVD ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A INVALID MOD/CMD RCVD N/A Stopped During instrument Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
IN DLTR DWNLD SYSTEM IN DLTR DWNLD processor configuration switch off and then on.
download, Instrument
Computer received
response from instrument
with incorrect destination.
INVALID SYSTEM ERROR RESET THE Yes Data is not available. INVALID SYSTEM No data displayed for Stopped Sample handler detected Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
COMMAND SYSTEM COMMAND the specimen. Data invalid command from switch off and then on.
displayed for the instrument . The system
previous specimen is locked up.
still displayed.
LOAD ELEVATOR FAILURE ERROR CHECK Yes If error occurred before LOAD ELEVATOR FAILURE Data displays if Stopped Load (right) elevator not 1. Perform the Right Elevator Up/Down test.
ELEVATOR aspiration was available. functioning. Load a. Set the Computer Switch to position 1
MECHANISMS completed, data is not elevator’s motor may have
b. From the Main menu, select Diagnostics tt
available. failed.
Operator Options tt Autoloader Tests tt Right
If error occurred after Elevator Up/Down and monitor for obvious
aspiration was obstructions to the movement of the elevator.
completed, data is
2. If the test fails, call your Beckman Coulter
available.
Representative.
LOW VACUUM OUT OF ERROR CHECK / ADJUST Yes If error occurred before LOW VACUUM OUT OF Data is invalid, dots (....) Stopped Low vacuum out of 1. Check that vacuum trap is not full of liquid.
RANGE LOW VACUUM aspiration was RANGE appear in all parameters. established operating 2. Check for obviously split or disconnected tubing.
completed, data is not range.
3. Perform a System Test to confirm the reading.
available. Range is 5.940 to 6.060 Refer to the Online Help topic: System Test.
If error occurred after in. of Hg (at sea level). 4. If the low vacuum reading is still out of range,
aspiration was adjust the vacuum (RG1). Refer to the Online Help
completed, data is topic: Adjust Pressure and Low Vacuum.
available.

PN 624602A 9-21
TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES

Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
AUTOLOADER NEEDLE ERROR INSTALL SHIELD Yes In Automode: AUTOLOADER NEEDLE Data is displayed if Stopped Needle shield removed Install the needle shield and reselect the desired
SHIELD OFF / RESELECT r If error occurred SHIELD OFF available. when not in Stop mode. function.
FUNCTION before aspiration
was completed,
data is not available.
r If error occurred
after aspiration was
completed, data is
available.
In Manual mode:
r If error occurred
before aspiration
was started, data is
not available.
r If error occurred
after aspiration was
started, data is
available.
ANALYZER TX BUFF ERROR CHECK Yes If error occurred before ANALYZER TX BUFF Data is displayed if Stopped Instrument Computer 1. Reset the instrument by turning the
REQUEST NOT ANALYZER transmission, data is REQUEST NOT available.. attempted to start new Standby/Reset switch off and then on.
SUCCESSFUL CABLES not available. SUCCESSFUL operation before previous 2. If the problem recurs, verify that cables are
If error occurred after operation was complete. plugged securely intot he correct jacks.
transmission, data is
available.
MULTI INTER. WHILE ERROR RESET THE Yes Data is not available. MULTI INTER. WHILE No data displayed for Stopped Instrument Computer Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
RECEIVING DATA SYSTEM RECEIVING DATA the specimen. Data detected communications switch off and then on.
displayed for the errors while receiving
previous specimen is data. The system locked
still displayed. up.
NEEDLE FORWARD ERROR REFER TO HELP Yes Data is not available. NEEDLE FORWARD No data displayed for Stopped Needle forward sensor 1. Verify the needle is seatd correctly.
SENSOR ERROR SENSOR ERROR the specimen. Data may be faulty. 2. If error recurs,call your Beckman Coulter
displayed for the Representative.
previous specimen is
still displayed.
NEEDLE HOME SENSOR ERROR REFER TO HELP Yes Data is not available. NEEDLE HOME SENSOR No data displayed for Stopped Needle forward sensor Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
ERROR ERROR the specimen. Data may be faulty.
displayed for the
previous specimen is
still displayed.

9-22 9-22 PN 624602A

 TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES 9
Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
COMMUNICATION ERROR ERROR CHECK Yes Data is available. N/A Available Stopped Failure in communications 1. Check serial communication connections between
COMMUNICATIO to Workstation Computer the Analytical Station and the Workstation.
NS on a message with data 2. If OK, reset the system (this re-starts the
associated. Instrument Computer).
3. Log On/Off Workstation Computer.
4. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
5. The Instrument Computer:
a. Queues original message and sends it
whenever communications are re-established.
b. Inhibit sample analysis until communication is
established.
RAW FILE TOO LARGE ERROR RESET THE Yes Data is not available. RAW FILE TOO LARGE Data is displayed. Stopped RAW.DAT file too large. Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
SYSTEM The system locked up. switch off and then on.

RED A/I/V OUT OF RANGE ERROR PERFORM Yes If error occurred before RED A/I/V OUT OF RANGE Data is invalid, dots (....) Stopped Red aperture current 1. Perform a System Test to confirm the reading.
SYSTEM TEST data acquisition, data is appear in all parameters. voltage (A/I/V) out of Refer to the Online Help topic: System Test.
not available. established range. Range 2. If problem recurs, call your Beckman Coulter
If error occurred after is 141.5 to 169.1 V. Representative.
data acquisitionwas
completed, data is
invalid.
RETIC VOLTAGE ERROR ERROR PERFORM Yes Data is not available. RETIC VOLTAGE ERROR No data displayed for Stopped Retic voltage out of 1. Perform a System Test to confirm the reading.
[XX.XX] SYSTEM TEST [XX.XX] the specimen. Data for established range. Range Refer to the Online Help topic: System Test.
Note: XX.XX = actual Note: XX.XX = actual previous specimen is is 0.20 to 1.20V. 2. If voltage is out of range, disinfect the Analytical
reading reading still displayed. Station. Refer to the Online Help topic: Bleach
Apertures and Flow Cell/Disinfect.
3. If error recurs, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
RETRIES EXCEEDED IN ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A RETRIES EXCEEDED IN N/A Stopped Three attemptss to Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
DILUTER DWNLD SYSTEM DILUTER DWNLD download diluter table switch off and then on.
from Instrument
Computer to instrument
failed. The system locked
up.
RETRIES FAILED 196CODE ERROR RESET THE Yes Data is not available. RETRIES FAILED 196CODE No data displayed for Stopped Three attempts to 1. Ensure the needle shield is installed properly.
DWNLD TO 376 SYSTEM DWNLD to 376 the specimen. Data for download sample handler 2. Ensure the Stop switch is not stuck.
previous specimen is code from Instrument
3. Reset the instrument by turning the
still displayed. Computer to instrument
Standby/Reset switch off and then on.
failed. The system locked
up.

PN 624602A 9-23
TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES

Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
RF VOLTAGE LOW ERROR RESET THE Yes Data is not available. RF VOLTAGE LOW No data displayed for Stopped RF voltage dropped below 1. Check that correct diluent is in use. Blood bank
SYSTEM the specimen. Data for lower limit saline can cause this error.
previous specimen is 2. Verify sheath tank contains liquid.
still displayed.
3. Perform a System Test to confirm the reading.
Refer to the Online Help topic: System Test.
4. If the RF voltage is still low, call your Beckman
Coulter Representative.
ROCKER BED NOT EMPTY ERROR RESTART THE Yes If error occurred before ROCKER BED NOT EMPTY Data is displayed if Stopped Cassette is located on the 1. Acknowldedge the error.
FUNCTION data acquisition, data is available. input (right elevator) 2. Initiate the Clear the Bed function. Either press
not available. when initiating a Right Ý+C Clear the Bed or from the Main menu,
If error occurred after Elevator Up/Down or on select Diagnostics tt Operator Options tt
data acquisition was the output (left elevator) Autoloader Tests tt Clear the Bed/Autoloader
completed, data is when initiating a Left Home to automatically clear the bed.
available. Elevator Up/Down
3. Re-initiate the original function.
function.
4. If the error persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
SAMPLE HANDLER ERROR RESET THE Yes Data is not available. SAMPLE HANDLER No data displayed for Stopped Instrument received illegal Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
COMM.FAILURE SYSTEM COMM.FAILURE the specimen. Data for message or has not switch off and then on.
previous specimen is received any message
still displayed. from sample handler.

SAMPLE HANDLER ERROR RESET THE Yes Data is not available. SAMPLE HANDLER No data displayed for Stopped Analyzer lost Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
COMMUNICATION ERROR SYSTEM COMMUNICATION ERROR the specimen. Data for communication with switch off and then on.
previous specimen is sample handler. The
still displayed. system locked up.

SAMPLE HANDLER NOT ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A SAMPLE HANDLER NOT N/A Stopped Instrument detected Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
OPERATIONAL SYSTEM OPERATIONAL severe sample handler switch off and then on.
error.

SAMPLE HANDLER ERROR CHECK NEEDLE Yes Data is not available. SAMPLE HANDLER No data displayed for Stopped Error detected by sample Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
SENSOR 16 ERROR ALIGNMENT SENSOR 16 ERROR the specimen. Data for handler sensor 16. Needle
previous specimen is not aligned
still displayed.

SAMPLE HANDLER ERROR CLEAN BED Yes Data is not available. SAMPLE HANDLER No data displayed for Stopped Error detected by sample 1. Clean the bed-position sensors.
SENSOR 17 ERROR POSITION SENSOR 17 ERROR the specimen. Data for handler sensor 17. Bed 2. To resume operation, access the appropriate
SENSOR previous specimen is position sensor should be screen, reselect mode of operation and rerun the
still displayed. cleaned or its faulty. sample.

9-24 9-24 PN 624602A

 TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES 9
Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
SAMPLE HANDLER ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A SAMPLE HANDLER N/A Stopped Instrument did not 1. Ensure the needle shield is installed properly.
TIMEOUT ERROR SYSTEM TIMEOUT ERROR respond to sample 2. Reset the instrument by turning the
handler within specified Standby/Reset switch off and then on.
time.

COMMUNICATION ERROR ERROR CHECK Yes Available. N/A N/A N/A N/A Available Stopped Failure in communications 1. Check serial communication connections between
COMMUNICATIO to Workstation Computer the Analytical Station and the Workstation.
NS on a message with data 2. If OK, reset the system (Workstation Computer
associated. and then Instrument Computer).
3. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
4. The Instrument Computer:
a. Queues original message and sends it
whenever communications are re-established.
b. Inhibits sample analysis until communication is
established.
SEND TO INSTRUMENT ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A SEND TO INSTRUMENT N/A Stopped Transmission of sampler 1. Ensure the needle shield is installed properly.
FAILED 196CODE SYSTEM FAILED 196CODE handler code from 2. Ensure the Stop switch is not stuck.
Instrument Computer to
3. Reset the instrument by turning the
instrument failed. The
Standby/Reset switch off and then on.
system locked up.
SHEATH PRESSURE OUT OF ERROR CHECK / ADJUST Yes If error occurred before SHEATH PRESSURE OUT Data is invalid, dots (....) Stopped Sheath pressure out of 1. Perform a System Test to confirm the reading.
RANGE SHEATH data acquisition, data is OF RANGE appear in all parameters. established operating Refer to the Online Help topic: System Test.
PRESSURE not available. range. 2. If the sheath pressure is still out of range, adjust
If error occurred after Range is 5.80 to 6.20 psi. the sheath pressure (RG3). Refer to the Online
data acquisition was Help topic: Adjust Pressure and Low Vacuum.
completed, data is
invalid.
STOP SWITCH ACTIVATED ERROR RESELECT Yes If error occurred before STOP SWITCH ACTIVATED Data is displayed if Stopped Stop switch activated 1. Access the appropriate screen and reselect the
FUNCTION aspiration was available when Autoloader module desired function.
completed, data is not was not in the Stop mode. 2. Ensure the Stop switch is not stuck or
available. disconnected.
If error occurred after
aspiration was
completed, data is
available.
SYSTEM BACKGROUND ERROR CHECK Yes If error occurred before SYSTEM BACKGROUND Data is displayed if Stopped Instrument did not Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
TIMEOUT DIGIBOARD transmission, data is TIMEOUT available. respond to background
not available. test in specified time.
If error occurred after
transmission, data is
available.

PN 624602A 9-25
TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES

Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
TEMP: ERROR PERFORM CBC Yes Data is not available. TEMP: No data displayed for Stopped Peltier module error 1. Run CBC sample with DIFF off.
AMBIENT = XX.XX ONLY AMBIENT = XX.XX the specimen. Data for occurred. 2. Perform a System Test to confirm the
LYSE = XX.XX LYSE = XX.XX previous specimen is XX.XX - actual ambient temperatures. Refer to the Online Help topic:
Note: XX.XX = actual Note: XX.XX = actual still displayed. and lyse readings. Range System Test.
reading reading for lyse is 30.8 to 128.0; 3. Check the right-side door and verify that the
See Note 1 there is no specific range Peltier fan is operational.
for ambient.
TRANSMIT FAILED ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A TRANSMIT FAILED N/A Stopped Transmission of sampler Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
196CODE SYSTEM 196CODE handler code from switch off and then on.
Instrument Computer to
instrument failed. The
system locked up.
TRANSMIT FAILED ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A TRANSMIT FAILED N/A Stopped Transmission of Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
376CODE SYSTEM 376CODE instrument processor switch off and then on.
code from Instrument
Computer to instrument
failed. The system locked
up.
TRANSMIT FAILED DILUTER ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A TRANSMIT FAILED N/A Stopped Transmission of diluter Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
TABLE SYSTEM DILUTER TABLE table from Instrument switch off and then on.
Computer to instrument
failed. The system locked
up.
TRANSMIT PORT NOT ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A TRANSMIT PORT NOT N/A Stopped Transmit port not 1. Reset the instrument by turning the
AVAILABLE SYSTEM AVAILABLE available for transmission Standby/Reset switch off and then on.
between Instrument 2. If problem recurs, verify the cables are plugged
Computer and instrument. firmly into the correct jacks.
TRANSMIT TO 376 FAILED - ERROR RESET THE Yes Data is not available. TRANSMIT TO 376 FAILED Data displayed if Stopped Transmission of sample Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
196CODE SYSTEM - 196CODE available (depends upon handler code from switch off and then on.
when error occurred). Instrument Computer to
instrument failed. The
system locked up.
UNABLE TO OPEN / READ ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A UNABLE TO OPEN / READ N/A Stopped Instrument Computer Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
196CODE HEX SYSTEM 196CODE HEX download code not able to switch off and then on.
open/read 196CODE.HEX
file and retrieve sample
handler code revision
number. The system
locked up.

9-26 9-26 PN 624602A


Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)
Error Message
UNABLE TO OPEN / READ
376CODE HEX
UNABLE TO OPEN / READ
DILUTER TBL
UNABLE TO PROCESS
REQUEST
INTERNAL ERROR [XXXX]
NOTE:
IXXX = Instrument internal
code
SXXX - Sample handler
internal code.
Possible values are:
S44, S45, S55, S56
PN 624602A
TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES 9
Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery
Status Log Message and
Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A UNABLE TO OPEN / READ N/A Stopped Instrument Computer Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
SYSTEM 376CODE HEX download code not able to switch off and then on.
open/read 376CODE.HEX
file and retrieve sample
handler code revision
number. The system
locked up.
ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A UNABLE TO OPEN / READ N/A Stopped Instrument Computer Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
SYSTEM DILUTER TBL download code not able to switch off and then on.
open/read DILUTE.TBL
file and retrieve sample
diluter file revision
number. The system
locked up.
ERROR RETRY THE Yes N/A UNABLE TO PROCESS N/A Stopped Instrument Computer
FUNCTION REQUEST could not process 1. At the Workstation Command Center, select
requested function to verify the mode was not previously selected.
because a 2. Reselect the desired function.
MODE-NOT-ACCEPTED or 3. If problem persists, reset the instrument by
START-NOT-ACCEPTED turning the Standby/Reset switch off and then on.
signal was received from
the Analytical Station.
ERROR RETRY THE Yes If error occurred before INTERNAL ERROR [XXXX] Data is displayed if Stopped Internal and unidentifiable Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
FUNCTION transmission, data is NOTE: available. instrument error with no switch off and then on.
not available. IXXX = Instrument internal message detected by
If error occurred after code CPU. The system locked
transmission, data is SXXX - Sample handler up.
available. internal code. r For S44 error:
Failure in tube
available switch.
r For S45 error:
Failure in tube
available switch.
r For S55 error:
Over allocation of all
available software
timers.
r For S56 error:
Over allocation of all
available software
timers.
9-27
TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES

Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
UPLOAD ELEVATOR ERROR CHECK Yes If error occurred before UPLOAD ELEVATOR Data is displayed if Stopped Unload (left) elevator not 1. Perform a Left Elevator Up/Down Test:
FAILURE ELEVATOR aspiration was FAILURE available. functioning. Unload a. Set the Computer Switch to position 1.
MECHANISM completed, data is not elevator’s motor may have
b. From the Main Menu, select Diagnostics tt
available. failed.
Operator Options tt Autoloader Tests tt Left
If error occurred after Elevator Up/Down and monitor for obvious
aspiration was obstructions to the movement of the elevator.
completed, data is 2. If the test fails, call your Beckman Coulter
available. Representative.
UNLOAD STACK FULL ERROR EMPTY THE Yes If error occurred before UNLOAD STACK FULL Data is displayed if Stopped Unloading bay reached 1. Remove the cassettes from the unloading bay so
UNLOAD STACK aspiration was available. maximum capacity. additional cassettes can be dispensed from the
completed, data is not rocker bed.
available. 2. If the loading bay is not full, call your Beckman
If error occurred after Coulter Representative.
aspiration was
completed, data is
available.
WATER TRAP DID NOT ERROR CONTACT Yes N/A WATER TRAP DID NOT N/A Stopped Water trap bleed solenoid 1. Reset the instrument by turning the
BLEED [XX.XX] SERVICE BLEED [XX.XX] energized, but pressure Standby/Reset switch off and then on.
Note: XX.XX = actual Note: XX.XX = actual did not drop in specified 2. If problem recurs, call your Beckman Coulter
60 psi reading 60 psi reading time. Representative.
WBC BATH OVERFLOW ERROR CHECK VACUUM Yes If error occurred before WBC BATH OVERFLOW Data is invalid, dots (....) Stopped WBC bath overflowed. 1. Verify the vacuum trap is empty and the float is
TRAP acquisition, data is not appear in all parameters. not stuck in the up position.
available. 2. If you corrected the overflow problem but are still
If error occurred after getting the error, the sensor may be wet. Call your
acquisition, data is Beckman Coulter Representative.
invalid. 3. If you cannot correct the overflow problem, call
your Beckman Coulter Representative.
WHITE A/I/V OUT OF RANGE ERROR PERFORM Yes If error occurred before WHITE A/I/V OUT OF Data is invalid, dots (....) Stopped White aperture current 1. Perform a System Test to confirm the reading.
SYSTEM TEST aspiration was RANGE appear in all parameters. voltage (A/I/V) is not Refer to the Online Help topic: System Test.
completed, data is not within established 2. If the White A/I/V is still out of range, call your
available. operating range. Beckman Coulter Representative.
If error occurred after Range is 100.6 to 129.6 V.
aspiration was
completed, data is
available.
WRONG DIGIBOARD ERROR CHECK Yes N/A WRONG DIGIBOARD N/A Stopped Digiboard incorrectly 1. Reset the instrument by turning the
SOFTWARE DIGIBOARD SOFTWARE installed or faulty. Standby/Reset switch off and then on.
2. Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.

9-28 9-28 PN 624602A

 TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES 9
Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
WRPORT UNAVAIL FOR ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A WRPORT UNAVAIL FOR N/A Stopped Analyzer not Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
376CODE SYSTEM 376CODE communicating with switch off and then on.
Digiboard. The system
locked up.

INVALID ERROR CODE ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A INVALID ERROR CODE N/A Stopped An invalid error code was Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
SYSTEM received by the switch off and then on.
Instrument Computer.

SYSTEM BACKGROUND ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A SYSTEM BACKGROUND N/A Stopped System background res 1 Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
RES 1 SYSTEM RES 1 switch off and then on.

SYSTEM BACKGROUND ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A SYSTEM BACKGROUND N/A Stopped System background res 2 Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
RES 2 SYSTEM RES 2 switch off and then on.

SYSTEM BACKGROUND ERROR RESET THE Yes N/A SYSTEM BACKGROUND N/A Stopped System background res 3 Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
RES 3 SYSTEM RES 3 switch off and then on.

MEMORY ERROR ERROR RESET THE Yes Data is not available. MEMORY ERROR No data displayed for Stopped Instrument Computer Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
SYSTEM the specimen. Data memory error detected. switch off and then on.
displayed for the The system locked up.
previous specimen is
still displayed.
RAW DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR RESET THE Yes Data is not available. RAW DATA Data is displayed. Stopped The system detected an Reset the instrument by turning the Standby/Reset
ERROR SYSTEM TRANSMISSION ERROR error during raw data switch off and then on.
transmission. The system
locked up.

RBC AND WBC BATH ERROR CHECK VACUUM Yes If error occurred before RBC AND WBC BATH Data is invalid, dots (....) Stopped RBC and WBC baths 1. Verify the vacuum trap is empty and the float is
OVERFLOW TRAP data acquisition, data is OVERFLOW appear in all parameters. overflowed. not stuck in the up position.
not available. 2. If you corrected the overflow problem, but are still
If error occurred after getting the error, the sensor may be wet. Call your
data acquisitionwas Beckman Coulter Representative.
completed, data is
invalid.

PN 624602A 9-29
TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES

Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
RBC BATH OVERFLOW ERROR CHECK VACUUM Yes If error occurred before RBC BATH OVERFLOW Data is invalid, dots (....) Stopped RBC bath overflowed. 1. Verify the vacuum trap is empty and the float is
TRAP data acquisition, data is appear in all parameters. not stuck in the up position.
not available. 2. If you corrected the overflow problem but are still
If error occurred after getting the error, the sensor may be wet. Call your
data acquisitionwas Beckman Coulter Representative.
completed, data is 3. If you cannot correct the overflow problem, call
invalid. your Beckman Coulter Representative.
+5.6 VDC OUT OF RANGE ERROR PERFORM Yes If error occurred before +5.6 VDC OUT OF RANGE Data is invalid, dots (....) Stopped +5.6 Vdc instrument 1. If the voltage reading is 0.00 replace Fuse F3.
SYSTEM TEST data acquisition, data is appear in all parameters. voltage is out of operating Refer to the Online Help topic: Replace Fuses.
not available. range. 2. If the voltage reading is > 0.00:
If error occurred after Range is +5.32 to a. Perform a System Test to confirm the reading.
acquisition, data is +5.88 Vdc. Refer to the Online Help topic: System Test.
invalid.
b. Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
SAMPLE HANDLER ERROR CLEAN Yes Data is not available. SAMPLE HANDLER No data displayed for Stopped Error detected by sample Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
SENSOR 12 ERROR CASSETTE SENSOR 12 ERROR the specimen. Data for handler.
DETECTION previous specimen is
SENSORS still displayed.

SAMPLE HANDLER ERROR CLEAN Yes Data is not available. SAMPLE HANDLER No data displayed for Stopped Error detected by sample Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
SENSOR 2 ERROR CASSETTE SENSOR 2 ERROR the specimen. Data for handler.
DETECTION previous specimen is
SENSORS still displayed.

SAMPLE HANDLER ERROR CLEAN Yes Data is not available. SAMPLE HANDLER No data displayed for Stopped Error detected by sample Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
SENSOR 3 ERROR CASSETTE SENSOR 3 ERROR the specimen. Data for handler.
DETECTION previous specimen is
SENSORS still displayed.

SAMPLE HANDLER ERROR CLEAN Yes Data is not available. SAMPLE HANDLER No data displayed for Stopped Error detected by sample Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
SENSOR 13 ERROR CASSETTE SENSOR 13 ERROR the specimen. Data for handler.
DETECTION previous specimen is
SENSORS still displayed.

SAMPLE HANDLER ERROR CHECK LOAD Yes Data is not available. SAMPLE HANDLER No data displayed for Stopped Error detected by sample Call your Beckman Coulter Representative..
SENSOR 8 ERROR ELEVATOR SENSOR 8 ERROR the specimen. Data for handler.
previous specimen is
still displayed.

SAMPLE HANDLER ERROR FREE CASSETTE Yes Data is not available. SAMPLE HANDLER No data displayed for Stopped Error detected by sample Call your Beckman Coulter Representative..
SENSOR 6 ERROR STACKS SENSOR 6 ERROR the specimen. Data for handler.
previous specimen is
still displayed.

9-30 9-30 PN 624602A

 TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES 9
Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
SAMPLE HANDLER ERROR FREE CASSETTE Yes Data is not available. SAMPLE HANDLER No data displayed for Stopped Error detected by sample Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
SENSOR 15 ERROR STACKS SENSOR 15 ERROR the specimen. Data for handler.
previous specimen is
still displayed.

SAMPLE HANDLER ERROR FREE CASSETTE Yes Data is not available. SAMPLE HANDLER No data displayed for Stopped Error detected by sample Call your Beckman Coulter Representative..
SENSOR 11 ERROR STACKS SENSOR 11 ERROR the specimen. Data for handler.
previous specimen is
still displayed.

NEEDLE SHIELD SENSOR ERROR CHECK NEEDLE Yes If error occurred before NEEDLE SHIELD SENSOR Data dispalyed if Stopped Error detected by needle 1. Ensure the needle shield is properly installed and
ERROR SHIELD SENSOR aspiration was ERROR available. shield sensor. The sensor reselect the desired function.
completed, data is not may be faulty. 2. If the problem persists, call your Beckman Coulter
available. Representative if the test fails.
If error occurred after
aspiration was
completed, data is
available.
SAMPLE HANDLER ERROR CHECK THE BED Yes Data is not available. SAMPLE HANDLER No data displayed for Stopped Error detected by sample 1. If a cassette is jammed on the bed, remove it.
SENSOR 9 ERROR MECHANISM SENSOR 9 ERROR the specimen. Data for handler sensor 11. Bed 2. Perform the Autoloader Test Routine:
previous specimen is mechanism sensor may
a. Place a cassette in the loading bay.
still displayed. be faulty.
b. Set the Computer Switch to position 1.
c. From the Main menu, select Diagnostics tt
Operator Options tt Autoloader Tests tt
Autoloader Test Routine.
3. If the test fails, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
INSTRUMENT DRIVE C ERROR None Yes Data is not available. INSTRUMENT DRIVE C No data displayed for Stopped Instrument Computer Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
< 1MB < 1MB the specimen. Data Drive C has <1 MB of
displayed for the space
previous specimen is
still displayed.
LOAD STACK NOT EMPTY ERROR EMPTY THE Yes N/A LOAD STACK NOT EMPTY N/A Stopped Loading bay not empty. 1. Ensure the load stack empty switch (S15) is not
LOAD STACK This prevents load (right) stuck or pushed inside the Autoloader housing.
elevator from functioning 2. Empty the loading bay.
properly.
3. Test the performance of the loading elevator by
reselecting desired function.

PN 624602A 9-31
TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES

Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
PARTIAL ASPIRATION N/A CHECK THE Yes If error occurred before PARTIAL ASPIRATION “P” appears next to all Stopped. Two attempts to aspirate 1. Ensure the specimen tube has a sufficient amount
SPECIMEN AND aspiration was parameter fields. “Partial from single tube of whole blood.
SYSTEM completed, data is not Aspiration” message unsuccessful. 2. Rerun the specimen in the Auto mode.
available. displayed in sample
3. If error recurs, rerun that specimen in the Manual
If error occurred after status message field.
mode.
aspiration was 4. Clean the needle.
completed, data is
invalid. a. Use one part, high quality fragrance free bleach
(5% sodium hypochlorite), one part, distilled
water in a cap pierce tube.
b. At the Instrument computer, select
Diagnostics, Operator Options, Fluid Tests,
Clean Needle.
c. Press ENTER.
d. Follow the screen instructions.
5. Cycle a whole blood with known results to verify
the needle.
6. To resume operation access the appropriate
screen, reselect the mode of operation and rerun
the specimens. Continue processing.
7. If the error persists call your Beckman Coulter
representative.
TEMP: N/A CYCLE NEXT One Data is available. TEMP: Data is displayed. N/A System temperature 1. Perform a System Test to confirm the
AMBIENT = XX.XX SPECIMEN long AMBIENT = XX.XX occurred. temperatures. Refer to the Online Help topic:
LYSE = XX.XX LYSE = XX.XX XX.XX - actual ambient System Test.
Note: XX.XX = actual Note: XX.XX = actual reading. Range for lyse is 2. Check the right-side door and verify that the
reading reading 30.8 to 128.0; there is no Peltier fan is operational.
specific range for
ambient.
COMPRESSOR PRESSURE NOT PERFORM Yes N/A COMPRESSOR PRESSURE N/A Stopped. Compressor pressure did Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
ERROR [XX.XX] READY SYSTEM TEST ERROR [XX.XX] not rise to normal
Note: XX.XX = actual Note: XX.XX = actual operating range.
reading reading Range is +55.0 to +65.0
psi.
SHUTDOWN PERFORMED SEE INSTR MUST PERFORM One Data is not available. SHUTDOWN PERFORMED No data displayed for Stopped Attempt made to run a 1. Run Startup
PREVIOUSLY LOG STARTUP long PREVIOUSLY the specimen. Data for sample before Startup 2. Select the desired mode to run tests.
previous specimen is cycle done. (Shutdown
still displayed. cycle done previously and
Instrument Computer
software disabled sample
cycles. Startup cycle must
be done).

9-32 9-32 PN 624602A

 TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES 9
Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
SOFTWARE AUTOLOADER SEE INSTR PERFORM One Data is not available. SOFTWARE AUTOLOADER No data displayed for Stopped When Startup was 1. Perform the Autoloader Test Routine:
CHECK FAILED LOG AUTOLOADER Long CHECK FAILED the specimen. Data for initiated, the Autoloader a. Place a cassette in the loading bay.
TEST ROUTINE previous specimen is failed one or more of the
b. Set the Computer Switch to position 1.
still displayed. checks performed.
c. From the Main menu, select Diagnostics tt
Operator Options tt Autoloader Tests tt
Autoloader Test Routine.
2. If the test fails, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative
CANNOT TRANSMIT CAL SEE INSTR. MUST STOP One N/A N/A N/A Active Communication failure Verify the cables are plugged firmly into tthe correct
FACTORS LOG INSTRUMENT long between the Workstation jacks.
and the Analytical
Station..

BACKWASH NOT SYSTEM PERFORM RINSE Yes If error occurred before BACKWASH NOT Data is displayed if Stopped Rinse block not in proper 1. Set the Computer Switch to position 1
PERFORMED HALT data acquisition, data is PERFORMED available. position for backwash. 2. Do a Rinse function (Diluter Functions tt Rinse)
not available. and monitor the movement of the rinse block to
If error occurred after ensure the block moves the full length of the
data acquisition, data is aspirator tip.
available. 3. Remove any obstructions.
CLEANER OUT SYSTEM REPLACE Yes Data is available. CLEANER OUT Data is displayed Stopped Out of cleaner signal 1. Check the level of cleaning agent.
HALT CLEANER detected from reagent 2. If reagent container is empty:
UPDATE FILE, sensor, insufficient
a. Replace the cleaning agent. Refer to the Online
PRIME cleaner to perform
topic: Replace Reagent Containers.
another cycle.
b. Update the reagent file.
c. Prime the cleaner and perform startup.
3. If reagent container is not empty, verify reagent
input tubing is connected properly at both ends.
INCONSISTENT SAMPLE SYSTEM CHECK Yes N/A INCONSISTANT SAMPLE N/A Stopped Instrument detected that 1. Verify the Stop switch is not stuck.
HANDLER HARDWARE HALT HARDWARE HANDLER HARDWARE downloaded software is 2. Reset the instrument by turning the
REINSTALL incompatible with sample Standby/Reset switch off and then on.
SOFTWARE handler hardware. The
3. If problem recurs, call your Beckman Coulter
system locked up.
Representative.
LYSE OUT SYSTEM REPLACE LYSE, Yes Data is available. LYSE OUT Data is displayed. Stopped Out-of-Lyse signal 1. Check the level of lytic reagent.
HALT UPDATE FILE, detected from reagent 2. If reagent container is empty:
PRIME sensor, insufficient lytic
a. Replace the lytic reagent. Refer to the Online
reagent to perform
topic: Replace Reagent Containers.
another cycle.
b. Update the reagent file.
c. Prime the Lyse.
3. If reagent container is not empty, call your
Beckman Coulter Representative.

PN 624602A 9-33
TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENT ERROR MESSAGES

Table 9.1 Instrument Error Messages (Continued)

Instrument Computer Workstation Computer Instrument Status/Recovery

Status Log Message and

Error Message Message Action Message Beeps Data Icon on Command Center Sample Results Instrument Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
PAK OUT SYSTEM REPLACE PAK, Yes Data is available. PAK OUT Data is displayed. Stopped Out-of-PAK signal 1. Check the level of PAK reagent.
HALT UPDATE FILE, detected from reagent 2. If reagent container is empty:
PRIME sensor, insufficient PAK
a. Replace the PAK reagent. Refer to the Online
reagent to perform
topic: Replace Reagent Containers.
another ccyle.
b. Update the reagent file.
c. Prime the PAK.
3. If reagent container is not empty, call your
Beckman Coulter Representative.
RINSE BLOCK ERROR SYSTEM CONTACT Yes Data is available. RINSE BLOCK ERROR Data is displayed. Stopped Rinse block did not return 1. Check whether the manual aspirator tip is fully
HALT SERVICE to home position. extended.
2. Check for a bent aspirator tip.
3. Perform the Probe Wash function.
a. Set the Computer Switch to position 1
b. From the Main menu, select Diagnostics tt
Operator Options tt BSV Tests tt Probe Wash
and monitor for obvious obstructions to the
movement of the rinse block.
4. If the test fails, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
SHEATH TANK EMPTY SYSTEM CHECK / PRIME Yes Data is not available. SHEATH TANK EMPTY Data is invalid, dots (....) Stopped Sheath tank is empty. 1. Check the sheath tank and tubing for any obvious
HALT DILUENT appear in all parameters. problems.
2. Prime the diluent.

WASTE CONTAINER FULL SYSTEM EMPTY WASTE Yes Data is not available. WASTE CONTAINER FULL No data displayed for Stopped Waste container is full.
HALT CONTAINER the specimen. Data for WARNING Risk of contamination. Biohazardous
previous specimen is contamination can occur from contact with the
still displayed. waste container and its associated tubing if not
handled with care. Wear protective gear. Avoid
skin contact. Clean up spills immediately.
Dispose of the contents of the waste container in
accordance with the local regulations and
acceptable laboratory procedures.

1. If the waste container is full, replace the waste

container; then resume operation. Refer to the
Online Help topic: Replace Waste Container.
2. If the waste container is not full, check harness to
ensure it is connected to the waste pickup tube.
SEC CBC CALIBRATION SYSTEM CLEAR TABLE Yes New data not available. SEC CBC CALIBRATION New data is not Stopped Calibration table is full. 1. Clear the table (delete 60 sample table).
TABLE FULL NOT or or TABLE FULL displayed. 2. Reselect the appropriate mode of operation to
READY CLEAR TABLE / one or rerun the desired test.
REREUN TEST long
N/A

9-34 9-34 PN 624602A

 TROUBLESHOOTING
WORKSTATION PC ERRORS 9
Note (1) This error is triggered by the following parameter; When the Defined Modified Temperature = 238.3 - ((131.7 deg. ambient) / 60.0) if the ABS (Lyse Temp. - Modified Temp.) > 5.0

9.7 WORKSTATION PC ERRORS

Table 9.2 Workstation PC Errors

Workstation System Status / Recovery

Log Message and Icon on Command Center Appliable Log Sample Results System Status Probable Cause Corrective Actions
Communication to LH 500 Instrument Instrument N/A Stop Failure in communications to analyzer. 1. Check serial communication connections between the Analytical
Workstation failed on operation “< Operation Station and the Workstation.
name >” 2. If OK, reset the system (this re-starts the Instrument Computer).
Where “< Operation name >” can be one of the 3. Log On/Off Workstation Computer.
following:
4. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
r Clear Alarm
5. The Instrument Computer:
r Stop Instrument
a. Queues original message and sends it whenever communications
r Send Manual Barcode are re-established.
r Change Instrument Run Configuration b. Inhibit sample analysis until communication is established.
r Send Calibration Factors
r Perform Startup
r Perform Shutdown
Calibration factors with sample data do not Instrument Not available Stop 1. The transmission was invalid. 1. Ensure the calibration factors are set to the same values on both the
match those stored on Workstation. Sample 2. Communications between the Instrument Computer and Workstation.
(<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>) discarded. Instrument Computer and the 2. If message persists, all your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Workstation failed.
3. Calibration factors were
corrupted.
An archive files with control samples was Control N/A Ready The operator archived control results Status Only: No action necessary.
created. via the QA menu functions.

PN 624602A 9-35
TROUBLESHOOTING
WORKSTATION PC ERRORS

9-36 9-36 PN 624602A

 10DATABASE AND TODO LIST 10
10.1 DATABASE & TODO WINDOW
This window enables you to see sample information stored in the database. The tree list on
the left side of the window provides an organized view of the database. The DataBase & ToDo
list in the upper right portion of the window displays specific records in the database. The
lower right portion of the window displays demographic or results information.

You can change the size of the three areas of this window by dragging the divider bars that
separate the three areas. You can change the size of columns by dragging the border of the
column heading. Each time you shut down and restart your Workstation, the sizes return to
the system-defined size.

Columns You May Not Understand

The Report column displays the following codes:

This Code Means The Sample Has Been

A Archived
D Delta Check Rule applied
H Received (sample request) from an
information system
P Printed
R Reflex Manager Rule applied
S Protected from DataBase overwrite. Stored
permanently for later retrieval
T Transmitted to an information system
V Validated by the operator.

Finding and Sorting

You can use the tree list to locate and sort the information displayed on this window. You can

also use to find information.

Double-click the heading of a column to sort the samples or sample requests by that column.
For example, double-click to sort by patient ID. * appears next to the
heading.

Selecting

Select This To
Expand the list of test groups.

Collapse the list of test groups.

PN 624602A 10-1
DATABASE AND TODO LIST
COMMON FUNCTIONS (OVERVIEW)

Select all the items in the selected folder.

Deselect all items in the selected folder.

Transmitting, Printing and Archiving

Similar to the Results & Graphics window, standard buttons appear at the top and side of this
window. After selecting records, select a button to perform the action associated with the

button. For example, select a group of sample results and then select to print the
sample results.

Some of the buttons require you to perform actions on one sample result or pending sample
at a time.

Other Actions

Select Slide List in the Database & ToDo completed window.

Select sample results in the list on the right side of the window that show slides requested but
no slides made.

Select to increment the Slides Made column and remove the sample from the ToDo slide
list. The Slides Made field in the Completed list will be incremented from 0 to 1.

10.2 COMMON FUNCTIONS (OVERVIEW)

Your LH 500 Series provides several common functions that work using the same
method—select the items you want, then select the function you want applied to the items.

You can set up default settings for most of the common functions to ensure the Workstation
handles your data in the same way each time you use the functions. Of course, the flexibility
exists to change the settings for the function. For example, you can quickly change the
printer to which you print items.

Transmitting Results
You can transmit results automatically or manually to your information system.

10-2 PN 624602A
 DATABASE AND TODO LIST
COMMON FUNCTIONS (OVERVIEW) 1
Printing Reports
Printing is an important part of working with sample results and controls. Your system
automates a lot of printing you do by enabling you to specify which results you want
automatically printed.

As part of setup, you can also specify reporting options.

Archiving Data
If you need to be able to retrieve sample results for samples run several months ago, use the
archive function.

Archiving data allows you to copy important sample result data (patient demographics,
results, and flags) to a diskette in a spreadsheet format. After copying the data to your
diskette, the Workstation deletes the data from the DataBase. This frees up valuable space on
your Workstation for additional sample results.

You can later retrieve the data using a spreadsheet application on another (non-LH 500 Series
Workstation) computer.

Deleting Data
When you no longer need to maintain results information, you can delete it. This saves room
on the Workstation, and it may enable you to find results in the DataBase faster.

Deleting Patient Data

1. Select the items you want to delete.
r If you are currently viewing the Results & Graphics window, only the current
results can be deleted.
r If you are currently viewing the DataBase & ToDo window, you can select several
samples that appear in the list and delete them as a batch.

2. Select to display the Patient Data — DELETION REQUESTED window.

3. Select to delete the data. A message that asks you to confirm your request
appears.

4. Select to delete the data. The Workstation deletes the selected data. The data
cannot be retrieved.

Deleting Sample Information

1. Find the Sample you want to delete.

PN 624602A 10-3
DATABASE AND TODO LIST
COMMON FUNCTIONS (OVERVIEW)

2. If you are working with the DataBase & ToDo window, ensure the sample is selected.
Otherwise, proceed to step 3.

3. If the sample is marked as saved, select to unmark it. The button changes to

to indicate that the sample results will no longer be saved.

4. Select to display the Patient Data - DELETION REQUESTED window.

5. Check the number of samples you want to delete.

6. Select . A confirmation window appears.

7. Select to confirm your deletion. The Workstation deletes the sample information
and returns to the previous window.

Printing
1. Select the items you want to print.
r If you are currently viewing the Results & Graphics window, only the current
results can be printed.
r If you are currently viewing the DataBase & ToDo window, you can select several
items that appear in the list and print them as a batch.

2. Select to display the Output Selection window.

3. Verify that the Output Selection window identifies the items you want to print.

4. Select to print the items. The Workstation sends the selected items to the default
printer based on the settings your verified.

Printing Help Topics

To print a Help topic you are currently viewing select .

To print a popup Help window, use your right mouse button to click inside the popup
window, and then select Print Topic.

Note: Reference Information, Cleaning Procedure, and Replacing Procedure Help Topics that
display full screen should be printed using Landscape Orientation.

10-4 PN 624602A
 DATABASE AND TODO LIST
COMMON FUNCTIONS (OVERVIEW) 1
What Prints When You Select

Run Configuration Application

Prints the information on the Run Configuration window.

Patient Application

For This Window Workstation Prints

Results & Graphics Sample data based on the parameters
specified for inclusion and reporting options
defined for the sample.
DataBase & ToDo Sample data based on the parameters
specified for inclusion and reporting options
defined for the sample.
Edit Sample All information displayed on the current
window.

Quality Assurance Application

For This Window Workstation Prints

Controls Control information based on your output
selection criteria.
Information Calibration Setup Calibration details for the selected lot
number.
All other windows Information displayed on the current
window.

Setup Application

For This Window Workstation Prints

System Setup All setup configuration information.
QA Controls Tab Control information for the selected
controls.
Flagging Limits Flagging limit information for the selected
limit name.
Reporting Options Reporting options for the selected report.
All other windows Information displayed on the current
window.

History Log Application

Prints the information in the selected log.

Status Application
Prints the information on the Status window.

PN 624602A 10-5
DATABASE AND TODO LIST
COMMON FUNCTIONS (OVERVIEW)

Color Printouts
Color printouts may not exactly match Workstation screen colors. This a function of how
Windows® 2000 supports peripherals such as printers. If the 'normal' colors printed make
interpretation difficult, you may be able to perform Halftone Color Adjustment for your
printer. You can determine if your printer supports halftone color adjustment by following
these steps:

1. Press Ctrl + Esc to display the Windows 2000 taskbar.

2. Select Settings Printers.
3. Select the Icon for your color printer.
4. Select File Properties.
5. Select the Device Settings tab and verify the color adjustments, such as Halftone Setup.
The available options on the properties screen depend on your printer model, but most
adjustments will be located on the Device Settings tab. Refer to your printer manual for
specific instructions.
You may need to experiment with different halftone settings to get the printout to more
closely match the colors displayed on the Workstation.

Archiving
Select the items you want to archive.

1. Select . An Archive Selection window appears.

2. Specify the archive options.

3. Select to specify the name of the archive file and the location where you want it
created. The Save As window appears.
4. Check the filename for the archived items.
5. Specify the drive where you want to archive the information.

6. Select to archive the selected items. The Workstation copies the items to the
archive location and marks the items in the database as archived. The archived items
remain in the database until deleted.

Reviewing Archived Information

1. Start your spreadsheet program, such as Microsoft® Excel.
2. Open the archive file. Refer to the product information for the spreadsheet program for
details about performing this step.
Note: When you archive information, the Workstation copies the information from the
DataBase into a comma separated text file. The file can be read by any spreadsheet
application. It is often referred to as a .CSV or a .TXT file.

The file can be retrieved into any spreadsheet application. Use your spreadsheet program’s
instructions to transpose the information if it is not in a readable format.

10-6 PN 624602A
 DATABASE AND TODO LIST
SAVING SAMPLE RESULTS 1
Understanding the Information
The archived information appears in a tabular format. Each column contains a label, but some
columns may appear condensed. This may make it difficult to read the labels. To view the
label, you must widen the columns. Refer to the product information for the spreadsheet
program for details about widening the columns.

The archived information appears with the same flags and codes that appear on the LH 500
Series Workstation.

Transmitting
1. Select the items you want to transmit to your information system. If you are currently
viewing the Results & Graphics window, only the current results can be transmitted. If
you are currently viewing the DataBase & ToDo window, you can select several items
that appear in the list and transmit them as a batch.

2. Select to display the Output Selection window.

3. Verify that the Output Selection window identifies all the items you want to transmit.

4. Select to transmit the items. The Workstation sends the selected items to your
information system. The items are sent based on the options set up for communicating
with your information system.

Transmitting Control Records

1. Select to display the Control Data Transmit Selection window.

2. Select to transmit Selected Control Records Only or All Control Records for Selected
Lot.

3. Select to transmit the items. The Workstation sends the selected items to your
information system. The items are sent based on the options set up for communicating
with your information system.
4. Menu Access: File Transmit Result(s)

10.3 SAVING SAMPLE RESULTS

1. Select on the Command Center to display the Patient Tests application.

2. Find the sample you want to save.
3. Select the sample on the DataBase & ToDo window, or display it in on the Results &
Graphics window.

PN 624602A 10-7
DATABASE AND TODO LIST
ADDING A SAMPLE REQUEST TO THE TODO LIST

4. Select to mark the sample results so they are saved in the database. As the
Workstation processes new samples, the new samples will not overwrite the saved

samples. The button changes to to indicate that the sample results will be saved.
The sample results are saved until you unmark them. To unmark the sample results, you

must select the sample again and then select .

10.4 ADDING A SAMPLE REQUEST TO THE TODO LIST

1. Select on the Command Center to display the Patient Tests application.

2. Select . The Add Test window appears with blank fields.

3. If you want to add a test or sample request:
a. Select the specific test identifiers you want to add.

b. Provide the sample identification information for the tests. Use to move
between fields.
c. Specify the demographic information.
NOTE: Duplicate Sample IDs or Cass/Pos are allowed for the same Patient ID only if
the Test Type is different. If the same test type is specified for a Sample ID, the
following message will display:
Duplicate Sample ID entry. Sample IDs must be unique within the ToDo list. Original
value will be restored.
Blank Patient IDs are considered to be the same Patient ID.

IMPORTANT Risk of incorrect identification. Before saving identification information, check that you typed
the information properly.

4. Select:

To save the test information and clear the fields on the window so
you can add another test.

To save the test information after the final entry.

10-8 PN 624602A
 DATABASE AND TODO LIST
DATABASE OVERVIEW 1
Adding a Test to an Existing Set of Sample Results

1. Select on the Command Center to display the Patient Tests application.

2. Find the results to which you want to add a test.

3. Select from the specific (right side) toolbar. The Edit Sample window appears.
4. Select the specific test identifiers you want to add or remove.
5. Provide the sample identification information for the tests. Use the tab key to navigate
between fields.
NOTE: Duplicate Sample IDs or Cass/Pos are allowed for the same Patient ID only if the
Test Type is different. If the same test type is specified for a Sample ID, the following
message will display:
Duplicate Sample ID entry. Sample IDs must be unique within the ToDo list. Original value
will be restored.
Blank Patient IDs are considered to be the same Patient ID.

IMPORTANT Risk of incorrect identification. Before saving identification information, check that you typed
the information properly.

6. Select to save the test information.

Reports with Pending status include a special message indicating the status. When all tests
complete processing, the report includes a special message that indicates the change in status.

10.5 DATABASE OVERVIEW

When the Workstation first receives sample information, the Workstation stores the data in a
series of files and the DataBase. The series of files is called list mode data. The DataBase stores
demographic, numeric and 2D DataPlot information.

The LH 500 Series stores data in a DataBase on the Workstation. This data includes all the
numeric and graphic information from:

r Patient sample analysis

r Quality control analysis
r Event logging.
The Workstation windows provide methods for accessing the DataBase.

The Workstation has no practical storage limit for control runs. However, the Workstation
will perform better if you delete unused control folders.

How Overwriting and DataBase Storage Work for Sample Results

Initially, the Workstation stores 2,000 sample results, which includes list mode, graphic, and
numeric results. As part of setup, your laboratory administrator can change the limits of the

PN 624602A 10-9
DATABASE AND TODO LIST
TODO LIST OVERVIEW

different types of sample data that the DataBase stores (up to 20,000). For example, your lab
administrator could reduce the graphic data storage.

When the Workstation receives sample results, the Workstation stores the results as graphic,
numeric and list mode data. When the Workstation reaches its list mode limit, it deletes the
oldest list mode data. When the Workstation reaches its graphic limit, it deletes the oldest
graphic data. When the Workstation reaches its numeric limit, it deletes the oldest numeric
data.

This effect of deleting the oldest data is known as “wrap-around.” Wrap-around on list mode
data is on a per run basis. Wrap-around on graphic and numeric are per sample basis.

Collated results remain in the DataBase based on the time the last sample results were collated
(not the time the DataBase received the first results).

DataBase Storage Limits and Saving Results

The Workstation uses the DataBase storage limits to determine how many results the
DataBase stores before overwriting the oldest, non-saved results with new results. The
Workstation also uses the limits to determine the maximum number of saved results that can
be maintained for educational purposes. The Workstation can maintain up to 15% of the
numeric (only) data as saved results.

10.6 TODO LIST OVERVIEW

The Workstation provides a ToDo list feature. This feature allows you to work with a list of
samples the instrument has not yet processed. You can view a list of all the unprocessed
samples or a list of unprocessed samples for a particular mode of operation. You can sort these
lists by any column you choose.

Samples appear in the ToDo list when:

r You download information from your information system and the instrument has not yet
processed them.
r You generate the list manually because you have no information system and you want to
store identification data for your samples in the ToDo list.
r You add a test to an existing sample result. This comes in handy if a physician orders a
second test or if you forget to add a test.
To add a sample to the ToDo list, the sample must include:

r At least one positive identifier

Examples: Cassette position
Sample ID
r The specific tests you want to run
Examples: CBC/Diff
CBC only
CBC/Diff/Retic
Retic only

10-10 PN 624602A
 DATABASE AND TODO LIST
TODO LIST OVERVIEW 1
You can also provide further identification information, such as the patient's name, birth date
and gender. You can even provide information defined by your laboratory, such as special
identification codes and comments. If the Workstation recognizes the patient ID, it
automatically fills in all known identification information.

To reduce the amount of typing when you add to the ToDo list, the Workstation provides
AutoSequencing for several fields. You can set up which fields you want automatically
sequenced and provide default values for them. You can also change these values individually.

The Collate ToDo List option performs the following functions:

r If a sample request is sent from the host that matches an existing pending order on all
three IDs (patient, cass/pos, sample) and is a superset of that order's test types, the orders
will be combined. For example, if a C was previously ordered and a CD order is
received, the orders will be combined into a single CD. If there is nothing to add (e.g., a
second C order is received), a separate order will be created.
Note: Matching includes NULL fields, such as two orders with empty Patient IDs.
The Automatic To Do List Deletion function allows you to determine how long entries remain
on the ToDo list. The user-specified timeframe deletes ToDo list entries older than 'x' hours
(range = 00 to 99 hours).

Setting Up AutoSequencing

1. Select on the Command Center to display the Patient Tests application.

2. Select to add a sample request to the ToDo list.

3. Select to display the AutoSequencing window.

4. Select the level at which you want to control AutoSequencing.
5. At the patient and test levels, for each identifier you want AutoSequenced:
a. Select the identifier—
r Patient Sequence Number
r Patient ID
r Sample ID
r Cass/Pos

b. Type the AutoSequence starting number. Use to move between fields.

6. Select to save the sequence starting numbers. The next time the Workstation
requires a sequence number, it uses the numbers you saved.

PN 624602A 10-11
DATABASE AND TODO LIST
COLLATION OVERVIEW

10.7 COLLATION OVERVIEW

Collation is the process of linking results obtained on the LH 500 Series in one run type, for
example CBC/Diff, with results from another run type, for example Retic. The two sets of
results get linked together in the DataBase. You can then review, print, transmit or archive the
collated results using the Workstation.

How Collation Works

The Workstation collates results based on your input before running the samples.

The Workstation can collate results automatically. When you turn on the AutoCollation
option on the Run Configuration window, the Workstation automatically collates results
when it finds a match of the sample ID within the AutoCollation time interval you specify.

If you add sample information on the Add window that includes more than one positive
identifier and more than one test, the Workstation recognizes that you want the results
collated. If you do not want to collate the information, you must add each positive identifier
and test on a new Add window.

The Workstation produces separate test results (not collated), if any of the following
conditions occur while analyzing samples:

r Partial Aspiration
r NO Read
r NO Match
r Subsequent test is run after the AutoCollation time interval on the Run Configuration
window has expired
r Diff or Retic % is invalid
r Flow cell is clogged (:::::)
If the Workstation collates two or more sets of results, parameter calculations are performed
based on the appropriate run type (examples: RET# is calculated from RET% of Retic
analysis; RBC is derived from the CBC analysis).

Printing Collated Reports

Reports with Pending status include a special message indicating the status. When all tests
complete processing, the report includes a special message that indicates the change in status.

10.8 SEARCHING FOR RESULTS OVERVIEW

Searching with Wildcards

If you want to find a specific group of samples

Type a combination of characters in a field on the DataBase Explorer window that includes an
*. This special character indicates any characters can be inserted where it is typed.

The Workstation searches for all samples that match the combination of characters.

Example: If you type 0002*, the Workstation finds all sample IDs that begin with 0002.

10-12 PN 624602A
 DATABASE AND TODO LIST
FINDING SAMPLE RESULTS USING THE DATABASE EXPLORER BUTTON 1
If a field is unimportant in searching

Leave the field blank or type *. The Workstation ignores the field when searching.

If you put a blank character in a field

The Workstation searches for samples with a blank character.

Results of a Search
Select on the DataBase & ToDo window to display the sample identification
information the Workstation found the last time you used the DataBase Explorer window.

The Workstation keeps this information to make it easy for you to access information you
need on a recurring basis.

Search Criteria
If you need to search for particular types of results on an ongoing basis, save a Search Criteria.

A Search Criteria is a group of attributes you specify on the DataBase Explorer window. The
attributes indicate what you want the Workstation to use when searching for results. For
example, if you want to find all the results with Critical limits, you would select Specific Flags
and Critical limits. Specific Flags and Critical limits are attributes of the Search Criteria.

You can save the Search Criteria and retrieve it later. This keeps you from having to set up
search criteria each time you want to look for sample results. It also reduces the chance for
error in specifying your search criteria. You can now quickly and easily devise complex
searches of the DataBase.

10.9 FINDING SAMPLE RESULTS USING THE DATABASE EXPLORER BUTTON

1. Select on the Command Center to display the Patient Tests application.

2. Select to display the DataBase Explorer window.

3. If you want to use an existing search criteria:
a. Select the previously saved search criteria name.

b. Select to load the search criteria.

4. Provide (or check) any or all of the following:
r Date
r Time
r Cass/Pos
r Patient ID
r Sample ID
r Flag Selection

PN 624602A 10-13
DATABASE AND TODO LIST
FINDING SAMPLE RESULTS USING THE DATABASE EXPLORER BUTTON

r Specific Flag Selection

5. If you want to save the search criteria to use again later, type a criteria name and select

6. Select to begin the search.

r The list of matches is sorted by numeric characters followed by alphabetic
characters.
r If the Workstation finds one or more matches, the DataBase & ToDo window

highlights the appropriate graphic ( ) and displays a list of the

matches.

Using a Search Criteria Name

1. If necessary, select to display the DataBase Explorer window.

2. Select next to the Load Saved Criteria field to see a list of available search criteria
names.
3. Select the search criteria name you want.

4. Select to load the search criteria.

5. Select to begin the search.

Saving Search Criteria

1. If necessary, select to display the DataBase Explorer window.

2. Provide (or check) any or all of the following:
r By Date
r By Time
r By Cass/Pos
r By Patient ID
r By Sample ID
r Flag Selection
r Specific Flag Selection

3. Select .

10-14 PN 624602A
 DATABASE AND TODO LIST
VIEWING DATABASE COUNT INFORMATION 1
4. Type the search criteria name you want to use.

5. Select to save the search criteria name.

10.10 VIEWING DATABASE COUNT INFORMATION

1. Select on the Command Center to access the Status application.

2. Select to display the current database count information.

3. The system displays the number of completed records and the number of ToDo records
in each database folder.

4. Select to close the window.

PN 624602A 10-15
DATABASE AND TODO LIST
VIEWING DATABASE COUNT INFORMATION

10-16 PN 624602A
 AAPPENDIX A A
A.1 TUBE LIST
Beckman Coulter does not recommend the use of one tube in preference to another nor
guarantee the acceptability of the sample tube to produce quality results. If you need
information on a tube not listed here, contact your Beckman Coulter Representative.

Please keep the following in mind when using this list:

r Use the tubes listed only with the cassette indicated.

r 13-mm cassettes are also known as 5-mL cassettes.
r 16-mm cassettes are also known as 7-mL cassettes.

CAUTION Possible system damage could occur if adapters for the Beckman Coulter® JT2 and JT3
analyzers are used for the LH 500 Series. Do not use these adapters on the LH 500 Series.

BECTON DICKINSON Glass Tubes with HEMOGARD Closure

o.d. x Length
No. Volume (mm) Cassette
367662 5.0 mL 13.0 x 75 Regular

BECTON DICKINSON Plastic Tubes with HEMOGARD Closure

o.d. x Length
No. Volume (mm) Cassette
367841 2.0 mL 13.0 x 75 Regular
367842 2.0 mL 13.0 x 75 Regular
367856 3.0 mL 13.0 x 75 Regular
367859 3.0 mL 13.0 x 75 Regular
367861 4.0 mL 13.0 x 75 Regular
367862 4.0 mL 13.0 x 75 Regular

COULTER Tubes

o.d. x Length
Type (mm) Cassette
5C Series cell control tubes 13.0 x 62 13 mm
Retic-C control tubes 13.0 x 31 None
S-CAL® calibrator tubes 13.0 x 62 13 mm

PN 624602A A-1
APPENDIX A
TUBE LIST

GREINER VACUETTE™ Tubes

o.d. x Length
No. Volume (mm) Cassette
454087 2.0 mL 13.0 x 75 Regular
454086 3.0 mL 13.0 x 75 Regular
454036 4.0 mL 13.0 x 75 Regular

KABE

No. Volume o.d. x Length (mm) Cassette

E201N 1.8 mL 11.5 x 50 Regular
Note: Premix samples using this tube (E201N) according to your laboratory's protocol.
E301N 3.0 mL 11.5 x 66 Regular

LABCO Exetainer™ Tubes

o.d. x Length
No. Volume (mm) Cassette
35241S140 3.0 mL 12.0 x 81 Regular
35271S159 5.0 mL 12.0 x 81 Regular

LABO EXPRESS SERVICE (LES)

o.d. x Length
Type Volume (mm) Cassette
Plastic purple 4.0 mL 13.0 x 75 Regular

LDM

o.d. x Length
No. Volume (mm) Cassette
940712 5.0 mL 12.0 x 75 Regular
940713 5.0 mL 12.0 x 75 Regular

LIP

.d. x Length
No. Volume (mm) Cassette

38887 2KE2.5/GL 2.5 mL 12.0 x 81 Regular

38908 2KE4/GL 4.0 mL 12.0 x 81 Regular

A-2 PN 624602A
 APPENDIX A
TUBE LIST A
38917 3KE4/GL 4.0 mL 12.0 x 81 Regular

SARSTEDT

o.d. x Length
No. Volume (mm) Cassette
05.1167.600 2.7 mL 11.5 x 66 13mm

SHERWOOD MEDICAL

No. Volume o.d. x Length (mm) Cassette

8881-311149 2.0 mL 10.25 x 50 13 mm
Note: Premix samples using this tube (8881-311149) according to your laboratory's protocol.
8881-311248 3.0 mL 10.25 x 64 13 mm
8881-314440 3.0 mL 13.0 x 75 13 mm
8881-311446 5.0 mL 13.0 x 75 13 mm
8881-311644 7.0 mL 16.0 x 75 16 mm

TERUMO TUBES

No. Volume o.d. x Length (mm) Cassette

T-272SQS 2.0 mL 10.25 x 50 13 mm
Note: Premix samples using this tube (T-272SQS) according to your laboratory's protocol.
T-273SQS 3.0 mL 10.25 x 65 13 mm
Note: Premix samples using this tube (T-273SQS) according to your laboratory's protocol.

TERUMO VENOJECT™ Tubes

o.d. x Length
No. Volume (mm) Cassette
T-206SQS 5.0 mL 13.0 x 75 13 mm
T-202SQS 7.0 mL 16.0 x 75 16 mm
T-325SQS 2.5 mL 13.0 x 75 13 mm

TERUMO VENOJECT II Foil Top

Note: The following tubes require a minimum of 1.8 mL of sample. Do not pierce these tubes
more than two times.

PN 624602A A-3
APPENDIX A
TUBE LIST

o.d. x Length
No. Volume (mm) Cassette
P-206SQK 5.0 mL 13.0 x 75 13 mm
P-225SQK 2.5 mL 13.0 x 75 13 mm

A-4 PN 624602A
 BAPPENDIX B B
B.1 BAR-CODE READER

Description
The HmX Hematology Analyzer uses a visible laser-type reader containing a Class II laser,
operating at a wavelength of 670 nm, with a maximum power output of 1 mW.

Settings and Defaults

Table 7.3 lists the available settings for the bar-code reader and the default setting for each
feature. To change a setting call your Beckman Coulter Representative. The default setting
appears in bold typeface.

Feature Interleaved 2 of 5 Codabar/NW7 Code 39 Code 128

Code Type Enabled/Disabled Enabled/Disabled Enabled/Disabled Enabled/Disabled
Fixed Length N/A Enabled/Disabled Enabled/Disabled Enabled/Disabled
Code Length No. 1 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
12, 14, 16 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16 15, 16 15, 16
Code Length No. 2 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, N/A N/A N/A
12, 14, 16
Check Digit Enabled/Disabled Enabled/Disabled Enabled/Disabled N/A
Check Digit Output Enabled/Disabled Enabled/Disabled Enabled/Disabled N/A
Check Digit Type N/A AIM-16/MOD-16 N/A N/A
(Coulter)/NW7
Intercharacter Gap N/A Enabled/Disabled Enabled/Disabled N/A
Start/Stop Match N/A Enabled/Disabled N/A N/A
Start/Stop Output N/A Enabled/Disabled N/A N/A
Narrow Margins Enabled/Disabled Enabled/Disabled Enabled/Disabled Enabled/Disabled

B.2 BAR-CODE SYMBOLOGY OVERVIEW

A bar-code symbol is a series of adjacent bars and spaces. The widths of the bars and spaces
represent the actual data encoded within the symbol. A device, usually called a scanner, or
reader is used to decode this data into human readable information. A bar-code symbology,
such as Interleaved 2-of-5, describes the unambiguous conventions or rules used for the way
in which data is encoded into the arrangement of the adjacent bars and spaces.

A symbology is defined by the following characteristics:

Character Set
This refers to the range of data characters that can be encoded for a specific symbology. There
are essentially three types:

PN 624602A B-1
APPENDIX B
BAR-CODES AND THE LH 700 Series

r Numeric—The symbology can encode only numeric characters.

r Alphanumeric—Can encode the full alpha and numeric characters of the ASCII
character set.
r 128—Can encode all the 128 available ASCII characters.

Symbology Type
There are essentially two types:

r Discrete—Each character is separated from the next by an intercharacter gap. This allows
each character to be decoded independently. Every character has a bar on each end.
r Continuous—Has no intercharacter gaps. Every character begins with a bar and ends
with a space.

Fixed or Variable Length

Some symbologies can only encode messages of a fixed length. Some can be used to encode
variable length data. Some should only be used as a fixed length to increase the security of
data decoding.

Self-Checking
A self-checking symbology has the ability to prevent character transposition due to a single
printing defect.

Start Code, Stop Code

Start and Stop Codes are bar and space patterns that are placed at the beginning and end of
the encoded data. A start code indicates the beginning of the symbol, and indicates the start of
the encoded information. The stop code indicates the end of the symbol and marks the end of
the encoded information.

Check Character, Checksum Algorithm

Virtually all bar-code symbologies use a check character. The check character is derived by a
mathematical calculation using the characters in the encoded information. It is used by the
scanning device to verify that the correct information has been decoded. It is highly
recommended that a check character, also called a checksum algorithm, is used.

Quiet Zone, Quiet Area

The Quiet Zone is a clear area on either side of the start and stop codes. It helps the scanning
device establish the reflectivity characteristics of the label.

B.3 BAR-CODES AND THE LH 700 Series

The LH 700 Series supports a wide variety of bar-code symbologies. When choosing a
symbology to use in your laboratory, it is important to understand the different bar-codes
available. Some bar-codes are more stable, and therefore less prone to misreads than others.

The following information is intended as a guide to help you in your selection process.

B-2 PN 624602A
 APPENDIX B
BAR-CODES AND THE LH 700 Series B
IMPORTANT Risk of misidentification. Use of poor quality, dirty, improperly placed or damaged bar-code
labels could keep the instrument from reading the bar-code labels. Ensure the bar-code labels are
undamaged. Ensure the bar-code labels conform to the specifications provided in the Bar-Code Label
Specifications section of this manual.

Checksum Algorithm
Beckman Coulter strongly recommends the use of bar-code checksums to provide automatic
checks for read accuracy.

IMPORTANT Use of bar-codes is an extremely accurate and effective method of positive patient
identification. Certain features, such as checksum digits, maximize accuracy in reading Codabar, Code 39
and Interleaved 2-of-5 labels. In one study, the use of checksum digits detected 97% of misread errors. Use
checksums to provide protection against occasional misread errors caused by problems such as damaged
or misapplied labels. If you must use bar-codes without checksums, Beckman Coulter recommends that
you verify each bar-code reading to assure correct patient identification.

Bar-code Symbologies Supported by the LH 700 Series

Interleaved 2-of-5
Interleaved 2-of-5 is a high density, continuous numeric symbology. It is self-checking. Every
character in the symbology encodes two digits, one in the bars and one in the spaces.

This symbology is susceptible to an incorrect read due to a partial scan (a scanning path that
does not include both leading and trailing quiet zones). The most common incorrect read is a
shorter, but valid decoding of the information. The presence of a checksum does not
eliminate this risk. It is recommended that any Interleaved 2-of-5 label contain Bearer Bars.
Alternatively, this label should be used with a fixed length only, with the scanning devices set
to recognize labels of a specific length (for example 12 digits).

Code 39 (Also called 3-of-9 Code)

Code 39 was the first alphanumeric symbology developed. It is a self-checking, discrete and
variable length symbology. The Health Industry Bar-code Council (HIBCC) has adopted the
use of a check character for health care applications. This is encouraged, particularly where
print quality is less than optimum.

Codabar
Codabar has a character set of 16 characters. It is a discrete, self-checking symbology and is
most commonly used in libraries and blood banks.

NW-7
NW-7 is very similar to Codabar. It uses the same character set. The difference is in the
checksum calculation.

Code 128/USS 128

Code 128 is a continuous, variable length symbology. This symbology has 106 different
printed characters.

PN 624602A B-3
APPENDIX B
BAR-CODE LABEL SPECIFICATIONS

Code 128 is character dependent. See AIM® Uniform Symbol Specification (USS) Rev. 1986
for additional required dimensional tolerances.

You must use and print a checksum character, and it must conform to the AIM USS 128
checksum generation procedure.

IMPORTANT If a laboratory uses Code 128 bar-code format, it must have checksum enabled. If the
checksum is disabled, the LH software produces a bar-code that does not comply with the Code 128
standard and cannot be read by bar-code scanners.

Do not use these values:

Code set A - 0, 64 through 102

Code set B - 0, 95 through 102
Code set C - 100 through 102
Do not use leading or trailing spaces in the ID.

Bar-code Tips
No bar-code symbology is perfect. You will occasionally get a read error. Below are some tips
to help you get the best performance from the symbology you choose:

r Use high quality labels.

r Always use a check character.
r Use fixed length bar-code information.
r Use Bearer Bars with Interleaved 2-of-5.
r When using the handheld scanner, check that the label was decoded correctly.

B.4 BAR-CODE LABEL SPECIFICATIONS

Handheld Scanner
Information about configuring the handheld scanner is located elsewhere.

General
A bar-code consists of black lines (bars) and white lines (spaces), which are called elements.

There are narrow elements (NE) and wide elements (WE); their arrangement is determined
by the code.

IMPORTANT Possible misidentified results. For accurate reading by the scanner, it is important that
bar-code labels for specimen tubes adhere strictly to the specifications given in this section. Labels that
meet these specifications are available from Beckman Coulter.

Optical Characteristics at 880 nm ±10% and 633 nm ±10%

r Print Contrast Signal (PCS): 80% min.
r Reflectivity of Media (RW): 80% min.
r Reflectivity of Ink (Rb): 16% max.

B-4 PN 624602A
 APPENDIX B
BAR-CODE LABEL SPECIFICATIONS B
r No spots or voids; no ink smearing.
r Edge roughness is included in the bar and space tolerances.
Measurement method is according to American National Standards Institute's
MH10-8M-1983.

PCS = Rw -- Rb X 100%
Rw

Printing Method
Photographic, thermal transfer, dot matrix, and laser printer.

Label Thickness
Maximum label thickness must be such that:

r The tube's outer diameter including the label is not greater than 13.3 mm.
r The label including adhesive = 0.006 ±0.003 in.

NE/WE Ratio
Must remain constant over code length.

Label Dimensions and Data

The dimensional and data specifications are illustrated in Figure 4.1. Table 4.13 explains the
specifications called out in Figure 4.1

PN 624602A B-5
APPENDIX B
BAR-CODE LABEL SPECIFICATIONS

Figure 2.1 Bar-Code Label Specifications

LEADING EDGE OF LABEL FIRST BAR LINE (SEE SPEC. 1)

A B
ALL SUBSEQUENT BAR LINES (SEE SPEC. 2)
HUMAN-READABLE
CODE (SEE SPEC. 3)

0.045 +0.045"
0.055"
630-370
0.005"
0.300"
MIN.
LABEL
WIDTH
(SEE SPEC. 9)

PLACEMENT
INDICATOR
(SEE SPEC. 8)
*
0.100 +0.030"

0.040+ CODE AREA

0.030" (SEE SPEC. 6)
0.062"

0.250"
0.250" MIN.
MIN.
LEADING QUIET TRAILING QUIET
ZONE (SEE SPEC. 7) ZONE (SEE SPEC. 4)
LABEL LENGTH
(SEE SPEC. 5)

Table 2.1 Bar-Code Label Specifications

Specification Called Out

in Figure 4.1 Explanation
1 The first bar of the code (B) must be parallel to the label edge (A) within 0.002".
2 All subsequent bar lines must be parallel to (B) within 0.001".
3 The human-readable code (HRC) does not include the checksum; the dash in the HRC is not
encoded in the bar-code.
4 The trailing quiet zone must be 0.250" minimum.
5 The maximum label length is determined by the tube length. The scanner can accommodate
labels up to 2.35". With HEMOGARD™ tubes, the maximum label length is 2.04".
6 The bar-code area contains the start character, data digits, checksum, and stop character.
7 The leading quiet zone must be 0.250" minimum.
8 The placement indicator shows you which end of the label goes next to the tube stopper. This
is an optional feature, not a mandatory one.
9 The width of the label must leave at least a 1/8" window for viewing the contents of the tube.
The maximum label width for a 10-mm diameter tube is 1.1". The minimum label width is
0.400".

B-6 PN 624602A
 APPENDIX B
BAR-CODE LABEL SPECIFICATIONS B
Acceptable Bar-codes
Within the given specifications, the scanner automatically distinguishes the following
bar-codes.

Interleaved 2-of-5
Code 39
Codabar* or NW7*
Code 128/USS 128

*Only one of these types (Codabar or NW7) can be active at the same time. The NW7
Code used on the instrument is the same as the Codabar symbology with a check digit.
The following table summarizes the code-related specifications.

Table 2.2 Code-Related Specifications

Interleaved Code 128****

Code 2-of-5 Codabar Code 39**** NW7 USS 128
Narrow element 0.010" ±0.020" 0.010"* 0.010" ±0.020" 0.010"* 0.010" ±0.020"
(NE) width Scaling Factor Scaling Factor
= 1.538* = 1.538*
Wide element/ (2.2 to 3): 1 N/A (2.21 to 3): 1 N/A N/A
narrow element
ratio (WE/NE)
Intercharacter gap No 0.010" Min. >=NE 0.010" Min. N/A
Data digits 2 to 16**** 3 to 16 3 to 16 3 to 13 3 to 16
(includes check (3 to 8 with
digit if enabled) HEMOGARD
tubes)
* According to American National Standard for bar-code specifications that yield 10 characters per inch at NE = 0.0065".
** Code 128 is character dependent. See AIM® Uniform Symbol Specification Rev. 1986 for additional required
dimensional tolerances.
*** You must use and print a checksum character, and it must conform to the AIM USS 128 checksum generation
procedure.
****The Interleaved 2-of-5 bar-code length is fixed at the instrument default value..

IMPORTANT If a laboratory uses Code 128 bar-code format, it must have checksum enabled. If the checksum is
disabled, the LH software produces a bar-code that does not comply with the Code 128 standard and cannot be read by
bar-code scanners.

Do not use these values:

Code set A - 0, 64 through 102
Code set B - 0, 95 through 102
Code set C - 100 through 102
**** Do not use leading or trailing spaces in the ID

PN 624602A B-7
APPENDIX B
BAR-CODE LABEL SPECIFICATIONS

Checksum Algorithm
Beckman Coulter strongly recommends the use of bar-code checksums to provide automatic
checks for read accuracy.

IMPORTANT Use of bar-codes is an extremely accurate and effective method of positive patient
identification. Certain features, such as checksum digits, maximize accuracy in reading Codabar, Code 39
and Interleaved 2-of-5 labels. In one study, the use of checksum digits detected 97% of misread errors.
Use checksums to provide protection against occasional misread errors caused by problems such as
damaged or misapplied labels. If you must use bar-codes without checksums, Beckman Coulter
recommends that you verify each bar-code reading to assure correct patient identification.

The algorithm for determining the checksum for each code is given below.

Note: For all codes, a check digit is counted as a data digit.

Interleaved 2-of-5
This code requires 2 to 16 data digits plus a checksum.

To determine the value of the checksum character:

1. Identify even- and odd-positioned characters in the message with the right-hand message
character always defined as an even-positioned character.
2. Sum the numeric values of the odd-positioned characters.
3. Sum the numeric values of the even-positioned characters and multiply the total by 3.
Sum the odd and even totals from steps 2 and 3.
4. Determine the smallest number which, when added to the sum in step 4, results in a
multiple of 10.
This number is the value of the checksum character.
5. Determine whether total number of characters (message plus checksum) is odd or even.
If odd, add a leading nonsignificant zero to the message to produce an even number of
characters as required by the symbology.
Example:

MESSAGE 1 2 5 6 7 8
PARITY 0 E 0 E 0 E

STEP 2: 1+5+7=13
STEP 3: (2+6+8)x3=48
STEP 4: 13+48=61
STEP 5: 61+9=70
Therefore, the checksum is 9, and the final decoded message is 01256789.

Codabar and NW7

Codabar uses 3 to 16 data digits. NW7 uses 3 to 13 data digits, including the check digit.

The value assigned to each of the characters is presented in the following table.

B-8 PN 624602A

CHARACTER VALUE
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
APPENDIX B
BAR-CODE LABEL SPECIFICATIONS B
CHARACTER VALUE
- 10
$ 11
: 12
/ 13
. 14
+ 15
A 16
B 17
C 18
D 19

The checksum technique is:

r The character value of a message is obtained from the above table and added together.
r This sum is divided by 16, and the remainder corresponds to the value of the checksum
character.
Examples:

1.

MESSAGE 2 3 4 7 1 3
VALUE 2 3 4 7 1 3

2+3+4+7+1+3 = 20
20 ÷ 16 = 1, REMAINDER 4
The value 4 corresponds to character 4; therefore, the checksum is 4 and the final
decoded message is 2347134.
2.

MESSAGE $ $ / / + + + +
VALUE 11 11 13 13 15 15 15 15

11+11+13+13+15+15+15+15 = 108
108 ÷ 16 = 6, REMAINDER 12
The value 12 corresponds to character :, therefore, checksum is :, and the final decoded
message is: $$//++++:

Japan Red Cross NW7 Decoding

Japan Red Cross Hospitals use the following NW7 values:

CHARACTER VALUE
0 0

PN 624602A B-9
APPENDIX B
BAR-CODE LABEL SPECIFICATIONS

1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9

The checksum technique is:

r The data digit value that is the difference between 11 and the Mod 11 sum of the
weighted values of the data digits is used as the check digit. The start and stop digits are
not used as part of the checksum calculation.
r NW7 is made up of 1 start digit, 9 data digits and 1 stop digit.
r The checksum digit immediately precedes the stop digit.
WEIGHTED MODULUS 11:

DIGIT POSITION
(Right Justified) 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
WEIGHT (1) 6 3 5 9 10 7 8 4 5 3 6 2
WEIGHT (2) 5 8 6 2 10 4 3 7 6 8 5 9

The first 9 digits from the right are used for the calculation of the check digit.

To determine the value of the checksum character:

1. Determine the Modulus 11 value corresponding to each character in the message.

2. Multiply each character in the message by the corresponding Mod 11 value.
3. Add the resulting values and divide by 11.
4. Subtract the remainder from 11.
5. Determine the character that corresponds to the result from step 4. This is the checksum
character.

B-10 PN 624602A
 APPENDIX B
BAR-CODE LABEL SPECIFICATIONS B
Examples:

1. MESSAGE 011529007
USE WEIGHT (1): 6 3 5 9 10 7 8 4 5 3 6 2
DIGIT POSITION
(Right Justified) 0 0 0 0 1 1 5 2 9 0 0 7
WEIGHT (1) 6 3 5 9 10 7 8 4 5 3 6 2
Result 0 0 0 0 10 7 40 8 45 0 0 14

0 + 10 + 7 + 40 + 8 + 45 + 0 + 0 + 14 = 124
124 ÷ 11 = 11, REMAINDER 3
When the REMAINDER IS 0, 0 is the check digit.
11 - 3 = 8
The value 8 corresponds to character 8, therefore the checksum is 8 and the final
decoded message is 0115290078
2. MESSAGE 023229006
USE WEIGHT (1): 6 3 5 9 10 7 8 4 5 3 6 2
DIGIT POSITION
(Right Justified) 0 0 0 0 2 3 2 2 9 0 0 6
WEIGHT (1) 6 3 5 9 10 7 8 4 5 3 6 2
Result 0 0 0 0 20 21 16 8 45 0 0 12

0 + 20 + 21 + 16 + 8 + 45 + 0 + 0 + 12 = 122
122 ÷ 11 = 11, REMAINDER 1
When the REMAINDER is 1, the calculation must be repeated using weight (2): 5 8 6 2
10 4 3 7 6 8 5 9
DIGIT POSITION 0 0 0 0 2 3 2 2 9 0 0 6
(Right Justified)
WEIGHT (2) 5 8 6 2 10 4 3 7 6 8 5 9
Result 0 0 0 0 20 21 6 14 54 0 0 54

0 + 20 + 12 + 6 + 14 + 54 + 0 + 0 + 54 = 160
160 ÷ 11 = 14, REMAINDER 6
When the REMAINDER is 0, 0 is the check digit.
11 - 6 = 5
The value 5 corresponds to character 5, therefore the checksum is 5 and the final
decoded message is 0232290065.

Code 39® Bar-code

This code uses 3 to 16 data digits.

The value assigned to each of the characters is:

PN 624602A B-11
APPENDIX B
BAR-CODE LABEL SPECIFICATIONS

CHARACTER VALUE CHARACTER VALUE CHARACTER VALUE

0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
A 10
B 11
C 12
D 13
E 14
F 15
G 16
H 17
I 18
J 19
K 20
L 21
M 22
N 23
O 24
P 25
Q 26
R 27
S 28
T 29
U 30
V 31
W 32
X 33
Y 34
Z 35
- 36
. 37
SPACE 38
$ 39
/ 40
+ 41
% 42

The checksum technique is:

r The character values of the message are obtained from the above table and added together.
r This sum is divided by 43, and the remainder corresponds to the value of the checksum
character.
Example:

CHARACTER S T U V W X Y F
VALUE 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 15

28+29+30+31+32+33+34+15 = 232
232 ÷ 43 = 5, REMAINDER 17; 17 = H = CHECKCHARACTER
The value 17 corresponds to character H; therefore, checksum is H, and the final
decoded message is: STUVWXYFH.

Code 128
This code uses 3 to 16 data digits.

The checksum character immediately precedes the stop character. The checksum character
used with Code 128 must conform to the AIM USS 128 checksum generation procedure. Do
not use these values:

Code set A - 0, 64 through 102

Code set B - 0, 95 through 102
Code set C - 100 through 102

B-12 PN 624602A
 APPENDIX B
BAR-CODE LABEL SPECIFICATIONS B
The checksum value (see the following table) is equal to the modula 103 sum of the value of
the start character and the weighted values of the data/special characters. The weights are one
for the first data/special character and continuing with two, three, four and so forth for the
following data/special characters.

For example, a label contains a START character (Code C), Data (25), a Check character and a
STOP character. The value of the Start character C is 105, and the data character for 25 is 25.
The weight of the first data character is one, so the check character value is calculated as follows:

105 + (25 x 1) = 130

where 105 and 25 are the values and 1 is the weight.
The checksum is equal to 130 modula 103 (the remainder of 130 divided by 103):

130 ÷ 103 = 1, REMAINDER 27

Therefore the check character equals character value 27, which is ; in Code Set A.

For additional information on this procedure, refer to AIM USS-128 Rev. 1986, published by
AIM, Inc., 1326 Freeport Road, Pittsburgh, PA 15238.

VALUE CODE A CODE B CODE C

0 SP SP 00
1 ! ! 01
2 " " 02
3 # # 03
4 $ $ 04
5 % % 05
6 & & 06
7 ' ' 07
8 ( ( 08
9 ) ) 09
10 * * 10
11 + + 11
12 , , 12
13 - - 13
14 . . 14
15 / / 15
16 0 0 16
17 1 1 17
18 2 2 18
19 3 3 19
20 4 4 20
21 5 5 21

PN 624602A B-13
APPENDIX B
BAR-CODE LABEL SPECIFICATIONS

22 6 6 22
23 7 7 23
24 8 8 24
25 9 9 25
26 : : 26
27 ; ; 27
28 < < 28
29 = = 29
30 > > 30
31 ? ? 31
32 @ @ 32
33 A A 33
34 B B 34
35 C C 35
36 D D 36
37 E E 37
38 F F 38
39 G G 39
40 H H 40
41 I I 41
42 J J 42
43 K K 43
44 L L 44
45 M M 45
46 N N 46
47 O O 47
48 P P 48
49 Q Q 49
50 R R 50
51 S S 51
52 T T 52
53 U U 53
54 V V 54
55 W W 55
56 X X 56
57 Y Y 57
58 Z Z 58
59 [ [ 59

B-14 PN 624602A
 APPENDIX B
BAR-CODE LABEL SPECIFICATIONS B
60 \ \ 60
61 ] ] 61
62 62
63 ___ ___ 63
64 NUL ` 64
65 SOH a 65
66 STX b 66
67 ETX c 67
68 EOT d 68
69 ENQ e 69
70 ACK f 70
71 BEL g 71
72 BS h 72
73 HT i 73
74 LF j 74
75 VT k 75
76 FF l 76
77 CR m 77
78 SO n 78
79 SI o 79
80 DLE p 80
81 DC1 q 81
82 DC2 r 82
83 DC3 s 83
84 DC4 t 84
85 NAK u 85
86 SYN v 86
87 ETB w 87
88 CAN x 88
89 EM y 89
90 SUB z 90
91 ESC { 91
92 FS | 92
93 GS } 93
94 RS ~ 94
95 US DEL 95
96 FNC 3 FNC 3 96
97 FNC 2 FNC 2 97

PN 624602A B-15
APPENDIX B
BAR-CODE LABEL SPECIFICATIONS

98 SHIFT SHIFT 98
99 CODE C CODE C 99
100 CODE B FNC 4 CODE B
101 FNC 4 CODE A CODE A
102 FNC 1 FNC 1 FNC 1
103 START (CODE
A)
104 START (CODE
B)
105 START (CODE
C)

B-16 PN 624602A
 REFERENCES

1. Coulter WH. High speed automatic blood cell counter and cell size analyzer. Paper
presented at National Electronics Conference, Chicago, IL, 1956; October 3.
2. Brecher G, Schneiderman M and Williams GZ. Evaluation of electronic red blood cell
counter. Am J Clin Path, 1956; 26:1439-1449.
3. Brittin GM, Brecher G and Johnson CA. Evaluation of the COULTER COUNTER Model
S. Am J Clin Path, 1969; 52(6):679-689.
4. Gottman AW. Multiple hematologic analyses by means of a COULTER COUNTER Model
S. Paper presented at International Symposium of Standardization of Hematological
Methods, Fondazione, Carlo Erba, Milan, Italy, November 9 and 10, 1970. Symposium
proceedings published in Haematologica Latina, 1969.
5. Hamilton PJ and Davidson RL. The interrelationships and stability of Coulter
S-determined blood indices. J Clin Path, 1973; 26:700-705.
6. Bessman JD and Johnson RK. Erythrocyte volume distribution in normal and abnormal
subjects. Blood, 1975; 46(3):369-379.
7. Price-Jones C. The diameters of red cells in pernicious anaemia and in anaemia following
haemorrhage. J Path Bact, 1922; 25:487-504.
8. England JM, Walford DM and Waters DAW. Re-assessment of the reliability of the
haematocrit. Brit J Haemat, 1972; 23:247-256.
9. Bull BS, Schneiderman MA and Brecher G. Platelet counts with the COULTER
COUNTER. Am J Clin Path, 1965; 44(6):678-688.
10. Mundschenk DD, Connelly DP, White JG and Brunning RD. An improved technique for
the electronic measurement of platelet size and shape. J Lab Clin Med, 1976;
88(2):301-315.
11. Schultz J and Thom R. Electrical sizing and counting of platelets in whole blood. Med
Biol Engr, 1973; 73:447-454.
12. Von Behrens WE. Mediterranean macrothrombocytopenia. Blood, 1975; 46(2):199-208.
13. Paulus JM. Platelet size in man. Blood, 1975; 46(3):321-336.
14. International Committee for Standardization in Haematology. Recommendations for
reference method for haemoglobinometry in human blood (ICSH Standard EP 6/2: 1977)
and specifications for international haemiglobincyanide reference preparation (ICSH
Standard EP 6/3: 1977). J Clin Path, 1978; 31(2):139-143.
15. Gauthier J, Harel P, Belanger C and Fraysse J. Human leukocytes: their size distribution
and mean corpuscular volume. Can Med Assoc J, 1967; 97:793-796.
16. Hughes-Jones NC, England JM, Norley I and Young JMS. Differential leucocyte counts by
volume distribution analysis. Brit J Haemat, 1974; 28(1):148.
17. England JM, Bashford CC, Hewer MG, Hughes-Jines NC and Down MC. A
semi-automatic instrument for estimating the differential leucocyte count. Biomed Engr,
1975; 10(8):303-304.
18. Wycherley PA and O'Shea MJ. Abridged differential leucocyte counts provided by a
Coulter Channelyzer in a routine haematology laboratory. J Clin Path, 1978;
31(3):271-274.
19. Oberjat TE, Zucker RM and Cassen B. Rapid and reliable differential counts on dilute
leukocyte suspensions. J Lab Clin Med, 1970; 76(3):518-522.

PN 624602A REFERENCES-1
REFERENCES

20. Hoffman RA and Britt WB. Flow-system measurement of cell impedance properties. J
Histochem Cytochem, 1979; 27(1):234-240.
21. Leif RC, Scwartz S, Rodriguez CM, Peel-Fernandez L, Groves M, Leif SB, Cayer M and
Crews H. Two-dimensional impedance studies of BSA buoyant density separated human
erythrocytes. Cytometry, 1985; 6(1):13-21.
22. Coulter WH et al. Signal modulated apparatus for generating and detecting resistive and
reactive changes in a modulated current path for particle classification and analysis. US
Patent 3,502,974, March 24, 1970.
23. Fulwyler MJ. Electronic separation of biological cells by volume. Science, 1965;
150:910-911.
24. Loken MR, Sweet RG and Herzenberg LA. Cell discrimination by multiangle light
scattering. J Histochem Cytochem, 1976; 24(1):284-291.
25. Jovin TM, Morris SJ, Striker G, Schultens HA, Digweed M and Arndt-Jovin DJ.
Automatic sizing and separation of particles by ratios of light scattering intensities. J
Histochem Cytochem, 1976; 24(1):269-283.
26. Miale JB. Laboratory Medicine: Hematology. CV Mosby Company, St. Louis, MO, 4th ed.,
1972; 22.
27. Corash L, Rheinschmidt M, Lieu S, Meers P and Brew E. Fluorescence-activated flow
cytometry in the hematology clinical laboratory. Cytometry, 1988; Supplement 3:60-64.
28. Friedman EW. Reticulocyte counts: How to use them, what they mean. Diagnostic
Medicine, 1984; 7(6):29-33.
29. Williams WJ, Beutler E, Erslev AJ, and Lichtman MA. Hematology. McGraw-Hill, Inc,
New York, NY, 4th ed., 1990; 416.
30. Brecher G. New methylene blue as a reticulocyte stain. Am J Clin Path, 1949;
19:895-896.
31. Dorsey DB. What can quality control do for hematology? Am J Med Tech, 1965;
Mar-Apr:150-153.
32. Bull BS. A statistical approach to quality control. Quality Control in Hematology,
Symposium of the International Committee for Standardization in Haematology. Lewis
SM and Coster JF, eds, Academic Press, London, England, 1975.
33. Koepke JA and Protextor TJ. Quality assurance for multichannel hematology
instruments. Am J Clin Path, 1981; 75(1):28-33.
34. Bull BS. A statistical approach to quality control. Quality Control in Hematology,
Symposium of the International Committee for Standardization in Haematology. Lewis
SM and Coster JF, eds, Academic Press, London, England, 1975.
35. Eckhoff RF. An experimental indication of the volume proportional response of the
Coulter Counter for irregularly shaped particles. J Sci Inst, 1967; 44:648-649.
36. Grover NB, Naaman J, Ben-asson S and Dojanski F. Electrical sizing of particles in
suspension III. Rigid spheroids and red blood cells. Biophys J, 1972; 12:1099-1116.
37. Waterman CS, Atkinson EE, Wilkins B, Fischer CL and Kimsey SL. Improved
measurement of erythrocyte volume distribution by aperture-counter signal analysis.
Clin Chem, 1975; 21:1201-1211.

REFERENCES-2 PN 624602A
REFERENCES

38. Kachel V and Ruhenstroth-Bauer G. Methodik and Ergebissne Optiseher

Formfatorunter-suchungen bei der Zellvolumenmessung nach Coulter. Micros Acta,
1976; 75:419-423.
39. Bull BS, and Elashoff RM et al.: 1974. A study of various estimators for the derivation of
quality control procedures from patient erythocytic indices. Am J Clin Path 61(4):475.
40. Koepke JA. Tips on technology. MLO:15, 1981.
41. NCCLS document H20-A. Approved Standard for the Evaluation of the Differential Cell
Count. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. Villanova, PA, 1992.
42. Miale JB, Laboratory Medicine - Hematology. 3rd Edition 1967, CV Mosby, pages
592-595
43. NCCLS document H44-A. Approved Guideline for Methods for Reticulocyte Counting
(Flow Cytometry and Supravital Dyes). National Committee for Clinical Laboratory
Standards. Villanova, PA, 1997
44. Moser K., Seelenbinder F., McFadden S., Adkins C., Goshay M., Davis F., Selecting a New
Analyzer for the Hematology Laboratory: The Experience at OhioHealth Hospitals, Lab.
Hematol 7:245-254, 2001.
45. Kaplan S., Johnson K., Wolfe N., Validation of Low Platelet Counts from Coulter LH 750
and Coulter Gen•S Analyzers, Lab. Hematol. 7:198-203, 2001.
46. Steele B., Wu N., Whitcomb C., White Blood Cell and Platelet Counting Performance by
Hematology Analzyers: A Critical Evaluation, Lab Hematol. 7:255-266, 2001.
47. Charie L., Harrison P., Smith C., Cobb J., Briggs C., Machin S., Accuracy in the Low
Platelet Count Range: A Comparison of Automated Platelet Counts on Beckman Coulter
High-Volume Hematology Analyzers with the ISLH/ICSH Platelet Reference Method,
Lab. Hematol. 7:236-244, 2001
48. Yee I., Keeney M., Johnson K., Brown W., Wolfe N., Kaplan S., White Blood Cell Flagging
Rates of the Coulter LH 750 Analyzer Compared with the Coulter Gen•S Hematology
Analyzer, Lab. Hematol. 7:211-216, 2001.
49. Keeney M., Brown W., Yee I., Platelet Counts and Flagging Rates from the LH 750
Hematology Analyzer Compared with the ICSH/ISLH Platelet Reference Method and the
Gen•S Hematology Analyzer, Lab. Hematol. 7:204-210, 2001.
50. Fernandez T., Domack L., Montes D., Pineiro R., Landrum E., Vital E., Performance
Evaluation of the Coulter LH 750 Hematology Analyzer, Lab. Hematol. 7:217-228, 2001.
51. Brown W., Kaplan S., Keeney M., Johnson K., Wolfe N., Yee I., Workflow Improvement
with Random Access and Enhanced Flagging on the New Coulter LH 750 Hematology
Analyzer, Lab. Hematol. 7:229-235, 2001.

Specimen Collection
1. Corash L. Platelet Sizing: Techniques, Biological Significance, and Clinical Applications.
Current Topics in Hematology. New York, New York: Alan R. Lise, Inc. 1983
2. Threatte GA, Andrados C, Ebbe S and Brecher G. Mean Platelet Volume: The Need for a
Reference Method. AJCP, 1984; 81:769-772.
3. Thompson CB, Diaz DD, Quinn PG, Lapins M, Kurtz SR and Valeri CR. The Role of
Anticoagulant in the Measurement of Platelet Volumes. AJCP, 1983; 80: 327-332.

PN 624602A REFERENCES-3
REFERENCES

4. NCCLS document H4-A3. Procedures for the collection of diagnostic blood specimens
by skin puncture. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. Villanova, PA,
1991.
5. NCCLS document H3-A3. Procedures for the collection of diagnostic blood specimens
by venipuncture. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. Villanova, PA,
1991.
6. NCCLS document H18-A. Procedures for the handling and processing of blood
specimens. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. Villanova, PA, 1990.
7. NCCLS document H15-A. Reference procedure for the quantitative determination of
hemoglobin in blood. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. Villanova,
PA, 1984.
8. NCCLS document H7-A. Procedure for determining packed cell volume by the
microhematocrit method. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards.
Villanova, PA, 1985.
9. NCCLS document H20-A. Approved Standard for the Evaluation of the Differential Cell
Count. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. Villanova, PA, 1992.
10. NCCLS document H44-A. Approved Guideline for Methods for Reticulocyte Counting
(Flow Cytometry and Supravital Dyes). National Committee for Clinical Laboratory
Standards. Villanova, PA, 1997.
11. Brunson D., Smith D., Bak A., Przyk E., Sheridan B., Muncer D.L., Comparing
Hematology Anticoagulants: K2EDTA vs. K3EDTA, Lab. Hematol. 1:12-119, 1995.
12. Phillips J., Coiner J., Smith E., Becker D., Leong J., Performance of K2EDTA vs. K3EDTA
-- Collected Blood Specimens on Various Hematology Analzyers, Lab. Hematol. 4:17-20,
1998.
13. Moser K., Seelenbinder F., McFadden S., Adkins C., Goshay M., Davis F., Selecting a New
Analyzer for the Hematology Laboratory: The Experience at OhioHealth Hospitals, Lab.
Hematol 7:245-254, 2001.

REFERENCES-4 PN 624602A
 INDEX

Symbols Adding a Sample Request, 10-8

+++++, 5-5 Adding a Test to an Existing Set of Sample
?????, 5-5 Results, 10-9
adjust, 3-11
adjust,control limits, 3-11
Numerics Adjusting Control Limits, 3-11
3 CONSECUTIVE FLOW CLOGS [LH 500 After 3 No Match, 8-32
analyzer], 9-12 aH, 5-5
3 CONSECUTIVE PARTIAL ASPIRATIONS aL, 5-5
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-13 An archive files with control samples was
3 CONSECUTIVE VOTEOUTS [LH 500 created [LH 500 analyzer], 9-36
analyzer], 9-13 analysis, 3-7, 3-13, 3-14, 5-1, 5-5
+5 Vdc OUT OF RANGE [XX.XX] [LH 500 ANALYSIS NOT DONE [LH 500
analyzer], 9-12 analyzer], 9-14
+5.6 VDC OUT OF RANGE [LH 500 analysis,control results, 3-7
analyzer], 9-30 analysis,flags and codes, 5-5
+6.3 Vdc OUT OF RANGE [XX.XX] [LH 500 analysis,histograms, 5-1
analyzer], 9-12 analysis,research data, 5-1
+12 Vdc OUT OF RANGE [XX.XX] [LH 500 analysis,reviewing reportable results, 5-1
analyzer], 9-11 analysis,XB, 3-13
+15 Vdc OUT OF RANGE [XX.XX] [LH 500 analysis,XB results, 3-14
analyzer], 9-11 analyzer, 1-14, 4-9
-15 Vdc OUT OF RANGE [XX.XX] [LH 500 ANALYZER POWER INTERRUPTION
analyzer], 9-11 [LH 500 analyzer], 9-14
+24 Vdc OUT OF RANGE [XX.XX] [LH 500 ANALYZER TX BUFF REQUEST NOT
analyzer], 9-11 SUCCESSFUL [LH 500 analyzer], 9-22
30 PSI OUT OF RANGE [XX.XX] [LH 500 anomalous, 5-5
analyzer], 9-13 anticoagulant recommendation, 4-1
+240 Vdc OUT OF RANGE [XX.XX] [LH 500 Application Buttons, 1-10
analyzer], 9-12 applications, 1-10
+300 Vdc OUT OF RANGE [XX.XX] [LH 500 archive, 10-2, 10-6
analyzer], 9-12 Archiving, 10-6
+1350 Vdc OUT OF RANGE[XX.XX] [LH 500 aspiration, 4-6, 4-7
analyzer], 9-11 aspiration volumes, 4-1
5C, 3-6 assigned values, 3-9
AUTO ANALYSIS, 1-11
AutoCollation option, 10-12
A AUTOLOADER NEEDLE SHIELD OFF
A/D FAILURE [LH 500 analyzer], 9-14 [LH 500 analyzer], 9-22
A/D MEASUREMENT ERROR [LH 500 automatic, 4-6, 8-10, 8-32, 10-11
analyzer], 9-14 automatic,output, 8-32
abnormal, 5-5 automatic,sequencing, 8-10, 10-11
access, 8-24 automatic,stop, 8-32
access,security, 8-24 AutoSequencing, 8-10, 10-11
action limits, 8-12, 8-14 AutoValidation, 5-11, 8-21
adapter, 4-4, A-1 AutoValidation Overview, 5-11
add, 5-2, 10-8, 10-9 AutoValidation,overview, 5-11
add,new test, 10-9 AutoValidation,setting up, 8-21
add,new tests, 5-2
add,sample request, 10-8

PN 624602A INDEX-1
INDEX
B [LH 500 analyzer], 9-15
background, 2-2
BACKWASH NOT PERFORMED [LH 500
analyzer], 9-33
BAD DOWNLOAD MSG RCVD - 196 CODE
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-14
BAD PORT IN USE TO SEND DATA [LH 500
analyzer], 9-14
Bar Code Symbology Overview, B-1
bar codes, B-1, B-2, B-4
acceptable, B-4
checksum algorithm, B-4
Codabar, B-4
Code 128, B-4
Code 39 bar code, B-4
code-related specifications, B-4
Interleaved 2-of-5, B-4
Japan Red Cross NW7, B-4
Japan Red Cross NW7 Decoding, B-4
NW7, B-4
overview, B-1, B-2
Bar Codes and the GENS System, B-2
bar-code, 4-3, 4-4
Barcode ID, 1-12
Bar-Code Label Specifications, B-4
bar-code labels, B-4
dimensions, B-4
label thickness, B-4
optical characteristics, B-4
printing method, B-4
specifications, B-4
BARCODE READER DID NOT RESPOND
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-14
batch, 10-4, 10-10
Becton Dickinson Glass Tubes, A-1
Becton Dickinson Plastic Tubes, A-1
biological hazards
contamination, prevention of, 9-35
blood, 1-14, 4-9
blood collection tubes, A-1
BLOOD COMPARISON OUT OF LIMITS
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-14
blood,detector, 1-14, 4-9
buttons, 1-10
buttons,command center, 1-10
C Changing the Instrument Name, 8-23
CAL FACTORS NOT WITHIN LIMITS
INDEX-2
calibration, 9-5
Calibration factors with sample data do not
match those stored on Workstation
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-36
calibration,overview, 9-5
CANNOT MOVE CASSETTE ON BED
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-15
CANNOT OPEN RAW DATA FILE [LH 500
analyzer], 9-15
CANNOT ROCK BED [LH 500
analyzer], 9-15
CANNOT TRANSMIT CAL FACTORS
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-33
capillary collection, 4-1
cap-piercing mode, 4-6
cassette, 1-14, 4-2, 4-3, 4-4, 4-5, A-1
Cassette Handling, 1-14, 4-5
CASSETTE LABEL NO READ [LH 500
analyzer], 9-15
CASSETTE LOAD FAILURE [LH 500
analyzer], 9-16
CASSETTE UNLOAD FAILURE [LH 500
analyzer], 9-16
cassette,handling, 1-14, 4-5
cassette,labeling, 4-3, 4-4
cassette,loading, 4-5
cassette,processing, 4-2
cassette,tube list, A-1
CBC, 3-6
CBC DATA ACQUISITION FAILURE [LH 500
analyzer], 9-16
CBC/Diff, 3-6
CD ROM drive, 1-9
Certifying Research Parameters, 8-11
cH, 5-5
change, 4-9, 5-2, 8-2, 8-5, 8-14, 8-23, 8-25,
8-33, 8-34
change,control setup information, 8-5
change,flagging limits, 8-14
change,instrument name, 8-23
change,password, 8-25
change,reagents, 8-2
change,sample results, 5-2
change,test mode, 4-9
changing, 8-25
Changing Reagent Information, 8-2
Changing Your Default Report, 8-31
PN 624602A

Changing Your Default Report Layout, 8-31
Changing Your Password, 8-25
changing,password, 8-25
characteristics, B-4
performance, B-4
check, 2-2
check,background, 2-2
check,daily, 2-2
check,Hgb voltage, 2-2
check,startup, 2-2
Checking Background Test Results, 2-2
Checking Daily Test Results, 2-2
Checking Hgb Voltage Test Results, 2-2
checksum algorithm, B-4
Codabar, B-4
Code 128, B-4
Code 39, B-4
Interleaved 2-of-5, B-4
Japan Red Cross NW7 Decoding, B-4
NW7, B-4
cL, 5-5
clean, 1-14, 4-5
clean,cassette, 1-14, 4-5
CLEANER OUT [LH 500 analyzer], 9-33
clip, 1-14, 4-4, 4-5, A-1
closed-vial mode, 4-6
Codabar bar code, B-4
Code 128 bar code, B-4
Code 39 bar code, B-4
codes, 3-7, 5-1, 5-5
codes,for controls, 3-7
codes,for results, 5-5
codes,reviewing results, 5-1
collation, 10-12
Collation Overview, 10-12
collation,overview, 10-12
collecting, 4-1
Collecting specimens, 4-1
color, 8-28
Command Center buttons, 1-10
COMMAND COMPLETE NOT SUCCESSFUL
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-16
COMMAND TO DIGIBOARD NOT
ACCEPTED [LH 500 analyzer], 9-16
comments, 3-7, 3-11
common, 10-2
Common Functions (Overview), 10-2
COMMUNICATION ERROR [LH 500
analyzer], 9-23, 9-25
Communication to LH 500 Instrument
PN 624602A
INDEX
Workstation failed on operation “<
Operation name>” [LH 500
analyzer], 9-36
communications, 8-20
components, B-4
components,dimensions, B-4
COMPRESSOR DID NOT BLEED [XX.XX]
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-16
COMPRESSOR PRESSURE ERROR [XX.XX]
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-32
computer, 8-32
control, 3-1, 3-6, 3-7, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12,
3-14, 8-3, 8-4, 8-5, 8-6, 8-7, 8-8, 8-32
control run (automatic mode), 3-6
control,adjust target limits, 3-11
control,auto-stop, 8-32
control,codes, 3-7
control,comments, 3-7, 3-11
control,control window, 3-10
control,cycling in automatic mode, 3-6
control,delete, 3-10, 8-4
control,edit, 8-5
control,edit limits, 8-5
control,outside limits, 3-9
control,quality, 3-14
control,review results, 3-7
control,saving IQAP, 3-12
control,setup, 8-3
control,setup latex ranges, 8-4
control,setup limits, 8-6
control,setup shifts, 8-8
control,XB/XM setup, 8-7
COULTER Tubes, A-1
CRC ERROR ON READ SYSTEM .CFG.FILE
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-17
criteria, 10-14
critical limits, 8-12, 8-14
customize flags, 5-3
cycling, 3-6, 4-5, 4-6, 4-7
Cycling Controls in Automatic Aspiration
Mode, 3-6
Cycling Samples in Automatic Aspiration
Mode, 4-6
Cycling Samples in Manual Aspiration
Mode, 4-7
cycling,automatic mode, 3-6, 4-6
cycling,manual mode, 4-7
INDEX-3
INDEX
D analyzer], 9-18
data, 3-10, 10-3, 10-4, 10-6
data,archive, 10-6
data,delete control, 3-10
data,print, 10-4
DataBase, 8-27, 10-1, 10-9, 10-14
DataBase & ToDo Window, 10-1
database explorer, 10-13
DataBase Overview, 10-9
database storage limits, 10-9
database wrap-around (overwriting), 10-9
DataBase,overview, 10-9
DataBase,search, 10-14
DataBase,storage limits, 8-27
DataBase,window, 10-1
date, 8-28
decision criteria, 8-33
default lot numbers, 8-34
default report, 8-31
definitive, 5-3, 8-12
definitive messages, 5-8
delete, 3-10, 8-4, 8-7, 10-2, 10-3
delete,control data, 3-10
delete,control setup information, 8-4
delete,lab limits, 8-7
delete,sample information, 10-3
Deleting Control Data, 3-10
Deleting Control Setup Information, 8-4
Deleting Lab Limits, 8-7
Deleting Sample Information, 10-3
delta check, 5-3, 8-15, 8-33
delta check,ON/OFF, 8-33
delta check,review patient history, 5-3
delta check,setup, 8-15
details, 8-19, 8-23, 8-24
detector, 1-14, 4-9
Diff, 3-1
DIFF DATA ACQUISITION FAILURE
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-17
DIFF PRESSURE OUT OF RANGE [LH 500
analyzer], 9-17
digits, 8-12
digits,setup extra, 8-12
DILUENT COMPARISON OUT OF LIMITS
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-17
DILUENT OUT [LH 500 analyzer], 9-17
Diluter Function, 3-1
Diluter Function,F57, 3-1
DILUTER TABLE ERROR [LH 500
INDEX-4
dimensions, B-4
disabling, 1-14, 4-9
diskette drive, 1-9
display, 8-9, 8-11
distribution curve, 5-1
DMS, 1-8
drive, 1-9
E
E, 5-5
edit, 5-2, 8-5, 8-14
edit,control setup information, 8-5
edit,flagging limits, 8-14
edit,lab limits, 8-5
edit,sample results, 5-2
Editing Control Setup Information, 8-5
Editing Existing Flagging Limits, 8-14
Editing Sample Results, 5-2
EDTA, 4-1
enabling, 1-14, 4-9
error, 3-7, 3-9, 9-5
ERROR READING SYSTEM.CFG FILE
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-18
ERROR UPDATING SYSTEM.CFG FILE
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-18
expected range, 3-9
expire, 8-2
extra digit, 8-12
F
fault isolation, 5-5
figure, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10, 1-15
FILE I/O ERROR [LH 500 analyzer], 9-18
files, 8-3, 8-4
files,delete control, 8-4
files,setup control, 8-3
find, 10-1, 10-13, 10-14
Finding Sample Results Using the Database
Explorer Button, 10-13
flag, 3-7, 5-1, 5-3, 5-5, 8-12, 8-14, 8-15
flag,edit limits, 8-14
flag,for controls, 3-7
flag,for results, 5-5
flag,priority, 5-3
flag,processing overview, 5-3
flag,setup limits, 8-12
flag,setup rules, 8-15
PN 624602A

flagging priorities, 5-3
format, 8-31
function, 3-1
function,F57, 3-1
G physical specifications, B-4
graphic, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10, 1-15
graphs, 5-1
Greiner Vacuette Tubes, A-2
H INSTRUMENT INTERNAL ERROR XXX
H, 5-5
handheld scanner, B-1, B-2
bar codes overview, B-1
handheld scanner,bar codes overview, B-2
help, 1-10
HEMOGARD, 4-3, A-1
Hgb, 2-2
HGB OUT OF RANGE [LH 500
analyzer], 9-18
HIGH VACUUM OUT OF RANGE [LH 500
analyzer], 9-19
HIS, 8-20
histogram, 5-1
history, 5-3
history,patient review, 5-3
host, 8-32
I INVALID 376 MOD/CMD RCVD 196 CFG
ID CANCELLED TIME EXPIRED [LH 500
analyzer], 9-19
identifier, 4-2, 8-9
Identifying Samples Overview, 4-2
ILLEGAL INSTRUMENT REPLY [LH 500
analyzer], 9-19
illustration, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10, 1-15
incomplete aspiration, 5-5
INCOMPLETE NEEDLE PIERCE [LH 500
analyzer], 9-19
INCOMPLETE NEEDLE RETRACT [LH 500
analyzer], 9-19
INCOMPLETE RAW DATA TRANSMISSION
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-19
INCOMPLETE SAMPLE HANDLER
SOFTWARE [LH 500 analyzer], 9-19
INCOMPLETE TUBE FORWARD [LH 500
analyzer], 9-20
PN 624602A
INDEX
INCOMPLETE TUBE RETRACT [LH 500
analyzer], 9-20
INCONSISTANT SAMPLE HANDLER
HARDWARE [LH 500 analyzer], 9-33
institution, 8-19
instrument, 1-10, 8-23, 8-24, B-4
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION ERROR
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-20
INSTRUMENT DRIVE C < 1MB [LH 500
analyzer], 9-31
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-20
INSTRUMENT PC DRIVE C: FAILURE
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-18
INSTRUMENT PC DRIVE C: FULL [LH 500
analyzer], 9-18
INSTRUMENT REPLY TIMEOUT [LH 500
analyzer], 9-20
INSTRUMENT TO 196 CODE DWNLD
FAILED [LH 500 analyzer], 9-20
instrument,change name, 8-23
instrument,ID, 8-24
instrument,on Command Center, 1-10
instrument,review settings, 8-24
Interleaved, 4-3
Interleaved 2-of-5 bar code
specifications, B-4
INTERNAL ERROR [XXXX] [LH 500
analyzer], 9-27
DLD [LH 500 analyzer], 9-20
INVALID 376 MOD/CMD RCVD 196 DWNLD
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-21
INVALID ERROR CODE [LH 500
analyzer], 9-29
INVALID MOD/CMD IN DLTR DWNLD
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-21
INVALID MOD/CMD RCVD 376 CFG
DWNLD [LH 500 analyzer], 9-21
INVALID MOD/CMD RCVD IN DLTR
DWNLD [LH 500 analyzer], 9-21
INVALID SYSTEM COMMAND [LH 500
analyzer], 9-21
IQAP, 3-12, 8-19, 8-24
IQAP,changing the number, 8-19
IQAP,checking the number, 8-24
IQAP,participating, 3-12
INDEX-5
INDEX

K analyzer], 9-31
KABE Tubes, A-2 loading, 4-5
keyboard, 1-9 Loading the Cassette, 4-5
loading,how to put tubes into a cassette, 4-5
local, 8-29
L locate, 10-13
L, 5-5 Logging OFF/ON, 2-1
lab limits, 8-7 logoff, 2-1
LABCO Exetainer Tubes, A-2 logon, 2-1
label, 4-3, 4-4, 8-9, B-1, B-2 lot number, 8-34
bar codes overview, B-1, B-2 LOW VACUUM OUT OF RANGE [LH 500
label,bar-code, 4-3 analyzer], 9-21
label,requirements, 4-4 LYSE OUT [LH 500 analyzer], 9-33
label,setup for display, 8-9
Labeling Requirements--Tubes without
Adapters or Clips, 4-4
M
labels, B-4 manual, 4-7, 10-4
bar-code, dimensions, B-4 manual,mode cycling, 4-7
bar-code, specifications, B-4 manual,print, 10-4
Labo Express Service (LES) Tubes, A-2 MEMORY ERROR [LH 500 analyzer], 9-29
laboratory, 8-6, 8-7, 8-19, 8-20, 8-32 message, 3-7, 3-9, 5-3, 5-8
laser, 9-1 microsample collection, 4-1
Laser Safety, 9-1 minimum sample volume, 4-1
Laser Warning Labels, 9-1 mode, 4-9
latex, 3-1, 8-4 modify, 5-2, 8-5, 8-14
LATRON, 3-1, 8-4 modify,control, 8-5
layout, 8-18 modify,flagging limits, 8-14
LDM Tubes, A-2 MULTI INTER. WHILE RECEIVING DATA
limit, 3-9, 8-5, 8-6, 8-12, 8-14, 8-15, 8-27, 1 [LH 500 analyzer], 9-22
0-9
limit,controls outside, 3-9 N
limit,database storage, 8-27, 10-9 name, 8-23, 10-14
limit,delta check, 8-15 NEEDLE FORWARD SENSOR ERROR
limit,edit lab limits, 8-5 [LH 500 analyzer], 9-22
limit,flagging, 8-12, 8-14 NEEDLE HOME SENSOR ERROR [LH 500
limit,laboratory, 8-6 analyzer], 9-22
limits for database storage, 10-9 NEEDLE SHIELD SENSOR ERROR [LH 500
linearity range, 5-5 analyzer], 9-31
link results (collate), 10-12 network, 8-29
LIP Tubes, A-2 NO Match, 5-3
LIS, 8-20 No Match processing, 4-2
list, 3-7, 5-5, 5-8, A-1 No Read, 5-3
list,control codes, 3-7 NW7 bar code, B-4
list,definitive messages, 5-8
list,flags and codes, 5-5
list,tube, A-1 O
LOAD ELEVATOR FAILURE [LH 500 OFF/ON, 8-33
analyzer], 9-21 open-vial mode, 4-7
LOAD STACK NOT EMPTY [LH 500 operation, 4-9

INDEX-6 PN 624602A
 INDEX

operator ID, 2-1 (Slidemaker), 1-15

optical characteristics for bar-code labels, B-4
outside, 3-9
outside,control limits, 3-9
overview, 3-1, 3-13, 4-2, 5-3, 6-1, 8-1, 9-5, 1
0-2, 10-10, B-1, B-2
barcodes, B-1, B-2
overview,calibration, 9-5
overview,troubleshooting, 9-5
overwriting (database wrap-around), 10-9
P picture, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10, 1-15
panic limits, 8-12, 8-14
parameter blocks, 5-11
parameters, 5-1, 5-3, 5-5, 8-11
parameters,flags and codes, 5-5
parameters,processing results, 5-3
parameters,review results, 5-1
parameters,setup to report, 8-11
Partial Aspiration, 5-3, 5-5
PARTIAL ASPIRATION [LH 500
analyzer], 9-32
Participating in IQAP, 3-12
password, 2-1, 8-25, 8-26
password,changing, 8-25
patient, 5-1, 5-3
pending, 5-2
performance characteristics, 1-15
performance characteristics,accuracy
(Slidemaker), 1-15
performance characteristics,accuracy CBC
parameters, 1-15
performance characteristics,accuracy
differential parameters, 1-15
performance characteristics,accuracy
reticulocytes, 1-15
performance characteristics,Autoloader
model, 1-15
performance characteristics,carryover, 1-15
performance characteristics,clinical
sensitivity, 1-15
performance characteristics,instrument, 1-15
performance characteristics,IRF, 1-15
performance characteristics,known
interfering substances, 1-15
performance
characteristics,mode-to-mode, 1-15
performance characteristics,MRV, 1-15
performance characteristics,precision
performance characteristics,precision CBC
parameters, 1-15
performance characteristics,precision
differential parameters, 1-15
performance characteristics,precision
reticulocytes, 1-15
performance characteristics,reference
ranges, 1-15
performance characteristics,RET%, 1-15
performance
characteristics,reticulocytes, 1-15
port, 8-20
positive ID, 4-2, 8-9
power, 1-10, 6-1, 6-2, 6-3
Power On/Off (Workstation), 1-10
Power On/Off Overview, 6-1
power,overview, 6-1
pre-assign, 10-10
precision, 2-2
primary mode, 4-6
print, 1-15, 8-9, 8-11, 8-18, 8-29, 8-31, 8-32,
10-2, 10-4, 10-5
print,content, 8-18
print,default report format, 8-31
print,graphic, 1-15
print,labels to print, 8-9
print,parameters to report, 8-11
print,results automatically, 8-32
print,setup default printer, 8-29
print,setup printer, 8-29
print,what prints, 10-5
Printer (graphic), 1-15
Printing, 10-4
problem, 5-5, 9-5
problem,flags and codes, 5-5
problem,troubleshooting overview, 9-5
process type, 1-11
processing, 3-6, 4-2, 4-6, 4-7
processing control, 1-10
Processing Control Field, 1-11
Processing Results Overview, 5-3
processing,No Match, 4-2
profile, 8-18
profile,setup reports content, 8-18
Providing Comments about Controls, 3-11

PN 624602A INDEX-7
INDEX
Q reset,Workstation, 6-3
QA, 3-1
QC, 3-1
quality, 3-1, 3-7, 8-3, 8-7
Quality Control Overview, 3-1
quality,QC overview, 3-1
quality,reviewing control results, 3-7
quality,setting up controls, 8-3
quality,setting up XB/XM analysis, 8-7
quick change, 8-30
R Retic, 3-1, 3-6
R, 5-5
ramp, 2-2
range, 3-9
RAW DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR [LH 500
analyzer], 9-29
RAW FILE TOO LARGE [LH 500
analyzer], 9-23
RBC AND WBC BATH OVERFLOW [LH 500
analyzer], 9-29
RBC BATH OVERFLOW [LH 500
analyzer], 9-30
reagent, 8-2
RED A/I/W OUT OF RANGE [LH 500
analyzer], 9-23
reference, 8-4, 8-12, 8-14
reference,editing existing flagging
limits, 8-14
reference,latex ranges, 8-4
reference,setting up flagging limits
setup, 8-12
References, REFERENCES-1, REFERENCES
-3
reflex manager, 5-3, 8-18, 8-33
reflex manager,setup rule environment, 8-18
reflex manager,turning ON/OFF, 8-33
report, 8-8, 8-9, 8-11, 8-12, 8-18, 8-31
report,layout, 8-31
report,parameters to report, 8-11
report,setup display labels, 8-9
report,setup layout, 8-18
report,setup positive ID, 8-9
report,setup profiles, 8-18
report,setup shifts, 8-8
report,units, 8-12
reset, 6-3, 8-26
reset,password, 8-26
INDEX-8
Resetting A Password, 8-26
Resetting the Workstation, 6-3
results, 2-2, 3-12, 3-14, 5-1, 5-2, 5-3, 5-5, 8-
32, 10-3, 10-7, 10-12, 10-13, 10-14
results,check background, 2-2
results,check Hgb voltage, 2-2
results,collate, 10-12
results,link, 10-12
results,processing, 5-3
results,reviewing samples, 5-1
results,XB, 3-14
RETIC VOLTAGE ERROR [XX.XX] [LH 500
analyzer], 9-23
Retic,cycling Retic-C automatic, 3-6
Retic,running latex Diff and Retic, 3-1
RETRIES EXCEEDED IN DILUTER DWNLD
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-23
RETRIES FAILED 196CODE DWNLD TO 378
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-23
review, 3-7, 3-14, 5-1, 5-3, 5-5
review,control results, 3-7
review,flags and codes, 5-5
review,histograms, 5-1
review,patient history, 5-3
review,research data, 5-1
review,sample results, 5-1
review,XB results, 3-14
Reviewing Control Results, 3-7
Reviewing Histograms, 5-1
Reviewing Patient History, 5-3
Reviewing Sample Results, 5-1
Reviewing Workstation Settings, 8-24
Reviewing XB/XM Results, 3-14
RF VOLTAGE LOW [LH 500 analyzer], 9-24
RINSE BLOCK ERROR [LH 500
analyzer], 9-34
ROCKER BED NOT EMPTY [LH 500
analyzer], 9-24
Rule Type Field, 1-13
rules, 5-3, 8-18
rules,setup environment, 8-18
run, 3-6, 4-6, 4-7, 8-30, 8-31, 8-32, 8-33
Run Configuration Window, 8-30
run controls (automatic mode), 3-6
run samples (automatic mode), 4-6
run samples (manual mode), 4-7
run,configuration
PN 624602A

procedures, 8-31, 8-32, 8-33
run,configuration window, 8-30
run,controls in automatic mode, 3-6
run,samples in automatic mode, 4-6
run,samples in manual mode, 4-7
Running Latex Control--Diff and Retic, 3-1
S saved sample results, 10-9
sample, 4-2, 4-6, 4-7, 5-1, 5-2, 5-5, 10-3, 10-
7, 10-13
sample collection, 4-1
SAMPLE HANDLER BARCODE SENSOR
ERROR [LH 500 analyzer], 9-24
SAMPLE HANDLER COMMUNICATION
ERROR [LH 500 analyzer], 9-24
SAMPLE HANDLER NOT OPERATIONAL
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-24
SAMPLE HANDLER SENSOR 11 ERROR
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-31
SAMPLE HANDLER SENSOR 12 ERROR
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-30
SAMPLE HANDLER SENSOR 13 ERROR
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-30
SAMPLE HANDLER SENSOR 15 ERROR
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-31
SAMPLE HANDLER SENSOR 16 ERROR
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-24
SAMPLE HANDLER SENSOR 17 ERROR
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-24
SAMPLE HANDLER SENSOR 2 ERROR
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-30
SAMPLE HANDLER SENSOR 3 ERROR
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-30
SAMPLE HANDLER SENSOR 6 ERROR
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-30
SAMPLE HANDLER SENSOR 8 ERROR
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-30
SAMPLE HANDLER SENSOR 9 ERROR
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-31
SAMPLE HANDLER TIMEOUT ERROR
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-25
sample request, 10-8
sample run (automatic mode), 4-6
sample run (manual mode), 4-7
sample storage, 4-1
sample volumes, 4-1
sample,cycling in automatic, 4-6
sample,cycling in manual, 4-7
sample,deleting results, 10-3
PN 624602A
INDEX
sample,editing results, 5-2
sample,finding results, 10-13
sample,identifying, 4-2
sample,reviewing research data, 5-1
sample,reviewing results, 5-1
sample,saving results, 10-7
Sarstedt Tubes, A-3
save, 10-7
Saving Sample Results, 10-7
Saving Search Criteria, 10-13, 10-14
screen, 8-27
screen,saver, 8-27
search, 10-13, 10-14
Search Results, 3-10, 10-1
Searching for Results Overview, 10-12
SEC CBC CALIBRATION TABLE FULL
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-35
secondary mode, 4-7
security, 8-24
send, 8-32
SEND TO INSTRUMENT FAILED 196CODE
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-25
sequencing, 8-10, 10-11
serial number, 8-24
Setting Up a New Printer, 8-29
Setting Up a Positive Identifier, 8-9
Setting Up AutoSequencing, 8-10, 10-11
Setting Up AutoValidation, 8-21
Setting Up Colors, 8-28
Setting Up Controls, 8-3
Setting Up DataBase Storage Limits, 8-27
Setting Up Date and Time, 8-28
Setting up Display Labels for Reporting, 8-9
Setting Up Flagging Limits, 8-12
Setting Up Institution Details, 8-19
Setting Up Laboratory Limits for
Controls, 8-6
Setting Up LIS / HIS Communications, 8-20
Setting Up Reporting Units, 8-12
Setting Up Reports, 8-18
Setting Up Rules for Flagging Sample
Results, 8-15
Setting Up Screen Saver, 8-27
Setting Up Shifts for Reporting, 8-8
Setting Up the Rule Environment, 8-18
Setting Up User Access Levels, 8-24
Setting Up Which Results to Print
Automatically, 8-32
Setting Up Which Results to Transmit
INDEX-9
INDEX

Automatically, 8-32 size, 8-27

Setting Up XB Analysis, 8-7 size,database, 8-27
Setting Up Your Default Printer, 8-29 SOFTWARE AUTOLOADER CHECK FAILED
settings, 8-24 [LH 500 analyzer], 9-33
setup, 1-14, 4-9, 8-1, 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, 8-6, 8-7, sorting, 10-1
8-8, 8-9, 8-11, 8-12, 8-14, 8-15, 8-18, specifications, B-4
8-19, 8-20, 8-23, 8-24, 8-26, 8-27, 8-2 bar-code label, B-4
8, 8-29, 8-30 Specifying Latex Reference Ranges, 8-4
Setup Overview, 8-1 Specifying the Parameters You Want to
setup,blood detector, 1-14, 4-9 Report, 8-11
setup,color, 8-28 specimen collection, 4-1
setup,controls, 8-3 specimen storage, 4-1
setup,database, 8-27 startup, 2-1, 2-2, 6-1
setup,date and time, 8-28 startup,log on, 2-1
setup,default printer, 8-29 status, 1-10
setup,definitive message, 8-12 Status Area, 1-12
setup,delta checks, 8-15 status,Command Center, 1-10
setup,display labels, 8-9 stop, 8-32
setup,flagging, 8-12, 8-14 STOP SWITCH ACTIVATED [LH 500
setup,institution details, 8-19 analyzer], 9-25
setup,instrument name, 8-23 storage, 8-27
setup,lab limits, 8-6 storage limits for database, 10-9
setup,latex ranges, 8-4 stored sample results, 10-9
setup,LIS/HIS, 8-20 storing, 4-1
setup,new printer, 8-29 Storing specimens, 4-1
setup,overview, 8-1 suspect messages, 5-8
setup,parameters to report, 8-11 system, 1-8
setup,positive ID, 8-9 SYSTEM BACKGROUND RES 1 [LH 500
setup,print content, 8-18 analyzer], 9-29
setup,reagents, 8-2 SYSTEM BACKGROUND RES 2 [LH 500
setup,reporting units, 8-12 analyzer], 9-29
setup,reset password, 8-26 SYSTEM BACKGROUND RES 3 [LH 500
setup,rule environment, 8-18 analyzer], 9-29
setup,screen saver, 8-27 SYSTEM BACKGROUND TMEOUT [LH 500
setup,shifts, 8-8 analyzer], 9-25
setup,user name, 8-24
setup,XB/XM, 8-7
SHEATH PRESSURE OUT OF RANGE T
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-25 TEMP: AMBIENT = XX.XX LYSE = XX.XX
SHEATH TANK EMPTY [LH 500 [LH 500 analyzer], 9-26, 9-32
analyzer], 9-34 Terumo Tubes, A-3
Sherwood Medical Tubes, A-3 Terumo Venoject Tubes, A-3
shifts, 8-8 test, 2-2, 4-9, 10-3, 10-8, 10-9
shutdown, 6-1, 6-2 test,add to existing set of sample results, 10-9
SHUTDOWN PERFORMED PREVIOUSLY test,adding, 10-8
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-32 test,changing modes, 4-9
shutdown,power on/off overview, 6-1 test,check background, 2-2
shutdown,Workstation, 6-2 test,check Hgb Voltage, 2-2
Shutting Down the Workstation, 6-2 test,check startup, 2-2
test,deleting, 10-3

INDEX-10 PN 624602A
 INDEX

threshold monitor, 5-1 Using Bar-Code Labels, 4-3

time, 8-28 Using Command Center, 1-10
ToDo list, 10-1, 10-8, 10-10 Using the Controls Window, 3-10
ToDo List Overview, 10-10
ToDo list,overview, 10-10
ToDo list,window, 10-1 V
traffic light, 1-10 validation codes and messages, 5-11
transmit, 8-32, 10-2 values, 3-9
TRANSMIT FAILED 196CODE [LH 500 venipuncture collection, 4-1
analyzer], 9-26 voltage, 2-2
TRANSMIT FAILED 376CODE [LH 500
analyzer], 9-26 W
TRANSMIT FAILED DILUTER TABLE
WASTE CONTAINER FULL [LH 500
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-26
analyzer], 9-35
TRANSMIT PORT NOT AVAILABLE [LH 500
WBC BATH OVERFLOW [LH 500
analyzer], 9-26
analyzer], 9-28
troubleshoot, 9-5
What Prints When You Select PRINT, 10-5
troubleshoot,overview, 9-5
WHITE A/I/V OUT OF RANGE [LH 500
tube, 4-2, 4-4, A-1, A-2, A-3
analyzer], 9-28
types, A-1, A-2, A-3
whole blood collection, 4-1
Tube List, A-1
worklist, 10-10
tube,tube list, A-1
Workstation, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10, 6-2, 6-3, 8-9, 8-
tube,types, A-1, A-2, A-3
11, 8-12, 8-14, 8-15
tube,universal processing overview, 4-2
Workstation (Back View), 1-8
tube,without adapters or clips, 4-4
Workstation Keyboard, 1-9
turn off/on, 8-33
Workstation,back view, 1-8
Turning Automatic Stop OFF/ON, 8-32
Workstation,keyboard, 1-9
Turning Decision Criteria OFF/ON, 8-33
Workstation,power on/off, 1-10
Workstation,setup, 8-9, 8-11, 8-12, 8-14, 8-
U 15
UNABLE TO OPEN / READ 196CODE HEX wrap-around, 10-9
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-26 WRONG DIGIBOARD SOFTWARE [LH 500
UNABLE TO OPEN / READ 376CODE HEX analyzer], 9-28
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-27 WRPORT UNAVAIL FOR 376CODE [LH 500
UNABLE TO OPEN / READ DILUTER TBL analyzer], 9-29
[LH 500 analyzer], 9-27
UNABLE TO PROCESS REQUEST [LH 500 X
analyzer], 9-27
XB, 3-13, 8-7, 8-32
universal tube processing, 4-2
XB Analysis Overview, 3-13
UNLOAD STACK FULL [LH 500
XB,auto-stop, 8-32
analyzer], 9-28
XB,overview, 3-13
UPLOAD ELEVATOR FAILURE [LH 500
XB,setup, 8-7
analyzer], 9-28
user, 8-24, 8-25, 8-26
user name, 2-1
user,change password, 8-25
user,reset password, 8-26
user,setup names and levels, 8-24
Using a Search Criteria Name, 10-14

PN 624602A INDEX-11
INDEX

INDEX-12 PN 624602A
 TRADEMARKS

5C, Beckman Coulter, Coulter, Coulter Clenz, Coulter Counter, Lin-C, Lyse S, S-Cal,
Z Series, Zap-Oglobin are trademarks of Beckman Coulter, Inc.

All other trademarks, service marks, products, or services are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.

PN 624602A
COULTER LH 500 SERIES SYSTEM HARD-COPY DOCUMENTATION

The Getting Started booklet and the Host Transmission manual come with your LH 500 Series System.
s Getting Started Overview of system hardware and software
PN 624601
s Host Transmission Specifications for transmitting to a host computer
PN 4277303
s Reference Use and Function • Installation • Operation Principles • Specifications/Characteristics •
PN 624604 Precautions/Hazards • References • Glossary • Index
Available in hard copy by request.
s Instructions for Use Controls and Indicators • Startup • QC • Sample Analysis • Data Analysis • Shutdown •
PN 624602 Analyzer CRT Functions • Workstation • Run Samples Display • To Do List • Database •
Controls • Setup • Appendices
Available in hard copy by request.
s Special Procedures Calibration • Cleaning Procedures • Replace/Adjust Procedures
PN 624603 Available in hard copy by request.
s Master Index Combined index for Reference, Instructions For Use, and Special Procedures manuals.
PN 624605 Comes with hard copy of Instructions For Use and Special Procedures.
The information in the Reference manual, Instructions for Use, and Special Procedures manual comes from the Online
Help System.

Come visit us at: www.beckmancoulter.com

Beckman Coulter Ireland Inc.

Mervue Business Park,
Mervue, Galway,
Ireland (353 91 774068)

Printed on Recycled Paper

Copyright © Beckman Coulter, Inc. 2004
All Rights Reserved